Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11

pioneer deh 4700mp error-11

i have a pioneer DEH P4700MP CD player for 4 months, It work well at the begining, after that it began to show "Error-11" with some CD'S, i cleaned the CD. FREE 2-day Shipping: Pioneer's DEH-P4700MP CD receiver pulls off a remarkable feat: it thrills the eyes and dazzles the ears, all at the same time! You'll. Operation Manual Multi-CD control High power CD player with FM/AM tuner DEH-P2650 English Español Português (B) Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer.

Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 - right

Messages 40, Cd player and care 40 cd-r/cd-rw discs 40, Understanding built-in cd player error messages – Pioneer DEH-P4700MP User Manual

background image

Understanding built-in CD

player error messages

When you contact your dealer or your nearest

Pioneer Service Center, be sure to record the

error message.

Message

Cause

Action

ERROR-11, 12,

17, 30

Dirty disc

Clean disc.

ERROR-11, 12,

17, 30

Scratched disc

Replace disc.

ERROR-10, 11,

12, 15, 17, 30,

A0

Electrical or me-

chanical

Turn the ignition

ON and OFF, or

switch to a differ-

ent source, then

back to the CD

player.

ERROR-22, 23 The CD format

cannot be played

back

Replace disc.

ERROR-44

All tracks are

skip tracks

Replace disc.

HEAT

CD player over-

heated

Turn off the CD

player until the CD

player cools down.

CD player and care

! Use only CDs that have either of the two

Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as

shown below.

! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert ir-

regular, non-round, shaped CDs they may

jam in the CD player or not play properly.

! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or

warping before playing. CDs that have

cracks, scratches or are warped may not

play properly. Do not use such discs.

! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)

surface when handling the disc.

! Store discs in their cases when not in use.

! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do

not expose the discs to high temperatures.

! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft

cloth outward from the center.

! If the heater is used in cold weather, moist-

ure may form on components inside the

CD player. Condensation may cause the CD

player to malfunction. If you think that con-

densation is a problem turn off the CD

player for an hour or so to allow it to dry

out and wipe any damp discs with a soft

cloth to remove the moisture.

! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

CD-R/CD-RW discs

! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs which have

been finalized.

Additional Information

En

40

Appendix

1 Operation Manual Multi-CD control High power CD player with FM/AM tuner DEH-P2650 English Español Português (B)

2 Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. I.E.) 24 Adjusting source levels 25 2 En

3 Contents English Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 26 Setting the clock 26 Setting the FM tuning step 26 Setting the AM tuning step 27 Switching the warning tone 27 Switching the auxiliary setting 27 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off 28 Using the AUX source 28 Selecting AUX as the source 28 Setting the AUX title 28 Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages 29 CD player and care 29 CD-R/CD-RW discs 30 Specifications 31 En 3

4 Section 01 Before You Start About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this units potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and observe precautions on this page and in other sections. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the battery with the plus (+) and minus () poles pointing in the proper direction. Precautions CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always keep the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car.! Protect this unit from moisture.! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed.! If this unit does not operate properly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. CAUTION! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium battery.! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer.! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the battery in fire.! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools.! Do not store the battery with metallic materials.! In the event of battery leakage, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new battery.! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions rules that apply in your country/area. Using the remote control Point the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. 4 En

5 Before You Start Section 01 Important! Do not store the remote control in high temperatures or direct sunlight.! The remote control may not function properly in direct sunlight.! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor, where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for safe keeping. English Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft.! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound.! You can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 27. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to this unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Important! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons tightly when removing or attaching.! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks.! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2 Grip the left side of the front panel and pull it gently outward. Take care not to grip it tightly or to drop it. En 5

6 Section 02 Whats What Head unit 1 CLOCK button Press to change to the clock display. 2 PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. 3 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 4 OPEN button Press to open the front panel. 5 FUNCTION button Press to select functions. 6 AUDIO button Press to select various sound quality controls. 7 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 8 BAND button Press to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions buttons Press for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi-cd player. a EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves. b VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends outward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press to cycle through all of the available sources. d DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. Remote control Operation is the same as when using the button on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which is explained below. 6 En

7 Whats What Section e h g 6 f 7 English 2 e CD button Press to select the built-in or multi-cd player as the source. f TUNER button Press to select the tuner as the source. g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume. En 7

8 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on % Press SOURCE to turn the unit on. When you select a source the unit is turned on. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-in CD player, load a disc in this unit (refer to page 12). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: Built-in CD playertelevisiontuner Multi-CD playerexternal unit 1External unit 2AUX Notes! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. When no disc is set in this unit. When no magazine is set in the multi-cd player. When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 27).! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. Two external units can be controlled by this unit. When two external units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit.! When this units blue/white lead is connected to the cars auto-antenna relay control terminal, the cars antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. % When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER: TelevisionTunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playermulti-cd player Sources off 8 En

9 Tuner Section 04 Listening to the radio These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 27). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Press SOURCE until tuner is selected as the source. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2, F3 for FM or AM. 4 To performmanual tuning, press c or d with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 5 To performseek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # You can cancel seek tuning by pressing either c or d with a quick press. # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Note When the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo the stereo (5) indicator will light. English En 9

10 Section 04 Tuner Introduction of advanced tuner operation Function display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: BSM (best stations memory)local (local seek tuning) # To return to the frequency display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a preset tuning button 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same preset tuning button 16 the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes! Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memory.! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LOCAL. Press FUNCTION until LOCAL appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to set the sensitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2LOCAL 3 LOCAL 4 AM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2 10 En

11 Tuner Section 04 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. 4 When you want to return to normal seek tuning, press b to turn local seek tuning off. LOCAL:OFF appears in the display. English Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSM. Press FUNCTION until BSM appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press b. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using 16. En 11

12 Section 05 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD 4 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 5 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your built-in CD player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. CD loading slot appears. # After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. 2 Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start. CD loading slot 6 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12- cm or 8-cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs.! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot.! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play, check that the label side of the disc is up. Press EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again.! If the built-in CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 29.! The built-in CD player is not equipped with CD TEXT function.! A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. EJECT button # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # To avoid a malfunction, make sure that no metal object comes into contact with the terminals when the front panel is open. 3 Close the front panel. 12 En

13 Built-in CD Player Section 05 Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)pause (pause) # To return to the playback display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. 3 Press b to turn repeat play off. RPT:OFF appears in the display. The track currently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order. 3 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. English Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn repeat play on. RPT:ON appears in the display. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. En 13

14 Section 05 Built-in CD Player 3 When you find the desired track press b to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from this unit, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. 14 En

15 Built-in CD Player Section 05! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one.! If you connect a multi-cd player, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. English Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. En 15

16 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD You can use this unit to control a multi-cd player, which is sold separately. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your multi-cd player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 3 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-cd player. Press SOURCE until multi-cd is selected as the source. 4 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 5 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! When the multi-cd player performs the preparatory operations, READY is displayed.! If the multi-cd player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-cd player owners manual.! If there are no discs in the multi-cd player magazine, NO DISC is displayed. 50-disc multi-cd player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-cd players. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Select a disc you want to listen to with the 16 buttons. For discs located at 1 to 6, press the corresponding number button. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, press and hold the corresponding numbers such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display. # You can also sequentially select a disc by pressing a/b. 16 En

17 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Introduction of advanced multi-cd player operation 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. Press c or d until the desired repeat range appears in the display.! MCD Repeat all discs in the multi-cd player! TRK Repeat just the current track! DSC Repeat the current disc English 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to current track. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)its-p (ITS play)pause (pause)comp (compression and DBE) # To return to the playback display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-cd player: MCD (multi-cd player repeat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (disc repeat). 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. Notes! If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to MCD.! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, MCD and DSC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. 4 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. En 17

18 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Note If you turn random play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DRDM appears in the display. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DSC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MCD, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press b to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or disc) will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. If you turn scan play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DSCAN appears in the display. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-cd player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. Creating a playlist with ITS programming You can use ITS to enter and playback up to 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-cd players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. Press a or b to select a CD. 18 En

19 Multi-CD Player Section 06 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-cd player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page Press FUNCTION to select ITS-P. Press FUNCTION until ITS-P appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn ITS play on. ITS-P:ON appears in the display. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are programmed for ITS play then EMPTY is displayed. 4 Press b to turn ITS play off. ITS-P:OFF appears in the display. Playback will continue in normal order from the currently playing track and CD. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNCTION. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track fromyour ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display. 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press b to erase a track fromyour ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, EMPTY is displayed and normal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. English En 19

20 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off. 1 Play a CD that you want to delete. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display. 3 Press b to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD fromyour ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLR is displayed. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. Then you can easily search for and select a desired disc for play. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi-cd player. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) # When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player, you cannot switch to TITLE IN. The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted.! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. 20 En

21 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions You can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player. Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below. Displaying titles on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title)art NAME (disc artist name)trk TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO D-TTL). Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL, ART NAME, TRK TTL and ART NAME. When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLAY and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display. Using compression and bass emphasis You can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using the COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi-cd player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. Press FUNCTION until COMP appears in the display. # If the multi-cd player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you attempt to select it. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite setting. Press a or b repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFDBE 1DBE 2 English En 21

22 Section 07 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows when custom equalizer curve is currently selected. 2 Equalizer curve Shows which equalizer preset is currently selected. 3 FIE indicator Shows when the front image enhancer is turned on. 4 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status. 5 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)eq (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)fie (front image enhancer)sla (source level adjustment) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA. # To return to the display of each source, press BAND. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FAD. Press AUDIO until FAD appears in the display. # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. FAD :F15 FAD :R15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press c or d, BAL : 0 is displayed. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL :L9 BAL :R9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. 22 En

23 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCAL CUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create.! A separate CUSTOM curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM.! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: EQ-L (low)eq-m (mid)eq-h (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. Fine adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each currently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H). English % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT Level (db) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W Frequency (Hz) Adjusting equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM. 1 Press AUDIO to select EQ. Press AUDIO until EQ appears in the display. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh En 23

24 Section 07 Audio Adjustments 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency. Press c or d until the desired frequency appears in the display. Low: (Hz) Mid: k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select the desired Q factor. Press a or b until the desired Q factor appears in the display. 2N1N1W2W Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. Press AUDIO until LOUD appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD :MID) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. Each press of c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low)mid (mid)hi (high) 4 Press b to turn loudness off. LOUD :OFF appears in the display. Note You can also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS. Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers, limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent a sudden increase in volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select FIE. Press AUDIO until FIE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E. off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. Each press of c or d selects frequency in the following order: (Hz) Notes! After turning the F.I.E. function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 22) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced.! Turn the F.I.E. function off when using a 2- speaker system. 24 En

25 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources.! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. English 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. Press AUDIO until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume. SLA : +4 SLA : -4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes! The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments.! The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. En 25

26 Section 08 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2 Press c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Pressing c or d will select one segment of the clock display: HourMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of different settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until the clock appears in the display. 3 Press FUNCTION to select one of the initial settings. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following settings: ClockFM (FM tuning step)am (AM tuning step)warn (warning tone)aux (auxiliary input) Use the following instructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down FUNCTION until the unit turns off. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press FUNCTION to select clock. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until clock appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to set the clock. Pressing a will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 khz, the preset step, and 50 khz. 1 Press FUNCTION to select FM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until FM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 100 khz and 50 khz. The selected FM tuning step will appear in the display. Note If seek tuning is performed in 50 khz steps, stations may be tuned in imprecisely. Tune in the stations with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. 26 En

27 Initial Settings Section 08 Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 khz, the preset step, and 10 khz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 khz (531 1,602 khz allowable) to 10 khz (530 1,640 khz allowable). 1 Press FUNCTION to select AM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the AM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the AM tuning step between 9 khz and 10 khz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AUX appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn AUX on or off. Pressing a or b will turn AUX on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., AUX :ON). English Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. You can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press FUNCTION to select WARN. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until WARN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn WARN on or off. Pressing a or b will turn WARN on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., WARN :ON). Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment connected to this unit. En 27

28 Section 09 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off You can turn the clock display on or off. % Press CLOCK to turn the clock display on or off. Each press of CLOCK turns the clock display on or off. # The clock display disappears temporarily when you perform other operations, but the clock display appears again after 25 seconds. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. Note Even when the sources are off, the clock display appears on the display. Pressing CLOCK turns the clock display on or off. Using the AUX source An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owners manual. 3 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 4 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until AUX appears in the display. # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switching the auxiliary setting on the previous page. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 28 En

29 Additional Information Appendix Understanding built-in CD player error messages When problems occur during CD play an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Message Cause Action ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc Clean disc. 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30 Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-10, 11, 12, 17, 30, A0 ERROR-22, 23 ERROR-44 HEAT Electrical or mechanical The CD format cannot be played back All tracks are skip tracks CD player overheated CD player and care Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then back to the CD player. Replace disc. Replace disc. Turn off the CD player until the CD player cools down.! Use only CDs that have the Compact Disc Digital Audio mark as show below.! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly.! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs.! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc.! Store discs in their cases when not in use.! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures.! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.! To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc.! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture.! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. English En 29

30 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized.! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit.! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.)! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the car.! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit.! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically.! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc.! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. 30 En

31 Additional Information Appendix Specifications General Rated power source V DC (allowable voltage range: V DC) Grounding system... Negative type Max. current consumption A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis mm Nose mm D Chassis mm Nose mm Weight kg Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output W 4 Load impedance... 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance V/1 kw Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency... 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB Mid Frequency /500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB High Frequency k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB Loudness contour Low db (100 Hz), +3 db (10 khz) Mid db (100 Hz), +6.5 db (10 khz) High db (100 Hz), +11 db (10 khz) (volume: 30 db) CD player System... Compact disc audio system Usable discs... Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency khz Number of quantization bits... 16; linear Frequency characteristics ,000 Hz (±1 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (1 khz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range db (1 khz) Number of channels... 2 (stereo) FM tuner Frequency range MHz Usable sensitivity... 8 dbf (0.7 µv/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 db) 50 db quieting sensitivity dbf (0.9 µv/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Distortion % (at 65 dbf, 1 khz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dbf, 1 khz, mono) Frequency response ,000 Hz (±3 db) Stereo separation db (at 65 dbf, 1 khz) AM tuner Frequency range ,602 khz (9 khz) 530 1,640 khz (10 khz) Usable sensitivity µv (S/N: 20 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Infrared remote control Wavelength nm ±50 nm Output... typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. English En 31

Mostrar más

Additional Information

Understanding built-in CD

player error messages

When you contact your dealer or your nearest

Pioneer Service Center, be sure to record the

error message.

Message

Cause

ERROR-11, 12,

Dirty disc

17, 30

ERROR-11, 12,

Scratched disc

17, 30

ERROR-10, 11,

Electrical or me-

12, 17, 30, A0

chanical

ERROR-22, 23

The CD format

cannot be played

back

ERROR-44

All tracks are

skip tracks

Sound muting

Sound from this unit is muted automatically in

the following cases:

! When a call is made or received using a

cellular telephone connected to this unit.

! When the voice guidance is output from a

Pioneer navigation unit connected to this

unit.

The sound is turned off, MUTE is displayed

and no audio adjustments, except volume con-

trol, are possible. Operation returns to normal

when the phone connection or the voice gui-

dance is ended.

Action

Clean disc.

Replace disc.

Turn the ignition

ON and OFF, or

switch to a differ-

ent source, then

back to the CD

player.

Replace disc.

Replace disc.

CD player and care

! Use only CDs that have either of the two

Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as

shown below.

! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert ir-

regular, non-round, shaped CDs they may

jam in the CD player or not play properly.

! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or

warping before playing. CDs that have

cracks, scratches or are warped may not

play properly. Do not use such discs.

! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)

surface when handling the disc.

! Store discs in their cases when not in use.

! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do

not expose the discs to high temperatures.

! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft

cloth outward from the center.

! If the heater is used in cold weather, moist-

ure may form on components inside the

CD player. Condensation may cause the CD

player to malfunction. If you think that con-

densation is a problem turn off the CD

player for an hour or so to allow it to dry

out and wipe any damp discs with a soft

cloth to remove the moisture.

! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

Appendix

25

En

Frontimageenhancer(F.I.E.)

TheF.I.E.(FrontImageEnhancer)functionisa

simplemethodofenhancingfrontimagingby

cuttingmid-andhigh-rangefrequencyoutput

fromtherearspeakers,limitingtheiroutputto

low-rangefrequencies.Youcanselectthefre-

quencyyouwanttocut.

Precaution

WhentheF.I.E.functionisdeactivated,therear

speakersoutputsoundofallfrequencies,notjust

basssounds.Reducethevolumebeforedisenga-

gingF.I.E.topreventasuddenincreaseinvo-

lume.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFIE.

2PressatoturnF.I.E.on.

#ToturnF.I.E.off,pressb.

3Presscordtoselectadesiredfre-

quency.

100160250(Hz)

Notes

!AfterturningtheF.I.E.functionon,usethebal-

anceadjustment(refertopage21)andadjust

frontandrearspeakervolumelevelsuntilthey

arebalanced.

!TurntheF.I.E.functionoffwhenusinga2-

speakersystem.

Adjustingsourcelevels

SLA(sourceleveladjustment)letsyouadjust

thevolumelevelofeachsourcetopreventra-

dicalchangesinvolumewhenswitchingbe-

tweensources.

!SettingsarebasedontheFMtunervolume

level,whichremainsunchanged.

!TheMW/LWtunervolumelevelcanalsobe

adjustedwithsourceleveladjustments.

1ComparetheFMtunervolumelevel

withthelevelofthesourceyouwishtoad-

just.

2PressAUDIOtoselectSLA.

3Pressaorbtoadjustthesourcevo-

lume.

SLA+4SLA4isdisplayedasthesourcevo-

lumeisincreasedordecreased.

AudioAdjustments

En

23

English

Section

08

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER DEH-4700MP user guide

(1)

You can read the recommendations in the user guide, the technical guide or the installation guide for PIONEER DEH-4700MP.

You'll find the answers to all your questions on the PIONEER DEH-4700MP in the user manual (information, specifications, safety

advice, size, accessories, etc.). Detailed instructions for use are in the User's Guide.

User manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

User guide PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Operating instructions PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instructions for use PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instruction manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

(2)

Manual abstract:

@@Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. @@! A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is affixed to the bottomof this unit. CAUTION MP3 file playback You can play back MP3 files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). !

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in anycommercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent

license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.

com. WMA file playback You can play back WMA files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). WAV fileplayback You can play back WAV files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (Linear PCM (LPCM)/MS ADPCM recordings). CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT !

The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in Germany. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! Protect this unit from moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or

discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! Should this product fail to operate properly, contact your dealer or nearestauthorized Pioneer Service Station. About WMA Features CD playback Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.

The Windows Media" logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. 4 En Section Before You Start 01 WMA is short for WindowsMedia Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows MediaPlayer version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly. ! With some applications used toencode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. Grab the right side of thefront panel and pull away to the left. The front panel will be detached from the head unit. English 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for

safe keeping.

Attaching the front panel 1 Place the front panel flat against the head unit. 2 Press the front panel into the face of the head unit until it is firmly seated.Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft. Important !

Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attaching. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep thefront panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press DETACH to release the front panel. Press DETACH and the rightside of the panel is released from the head unit. En 5 Section 02 Whats What 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Head unit 1 TA button Press to turn TA function on or off.

Press and hold to turn AF function on or off.

2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. 3 EJECT button Press to eject a CD from your built-in CD player. 4 AUDIO button Press to select various soundquality controls. 5 DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. 6 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search

controls.

Also used for controlling functions. 7 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 8 DETACH button Press to remove the front panel from the headunit. 9 BAND button Press to select among two FM and MW/LW bands and cancel the control mode of functions. a LOCAL/BSM button Press to turn local

function on or off.

Press and hold to turn BSM function on or off. b 16 buttons Press for preset tuning. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press tocycle through all the available sources. d VOLUME Rotate it to increase or decrease the volume. e EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves.Optional remote control The steering remote control CD-R300 is sold separately. 6 En Section Whats What 02 f English 9 k j i g 4 h 6 Operation is the same

as when using the buttons on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which isexplained below. f VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume.

g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h TUNER button Press to selectthe tuner as the source. i PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. j CD button Press to select the built-in CD player as the source. k FUNCTION buttonNot used. En 7 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on and selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-inCD player, load a disc in the unit (refer to page 14). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch

between the following sources: Built-in CD playerTuner When you select a source the unit is turned on.

% When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER:TunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playerSources off Notes ! When no disc has been set in the unit, the source will not switch to the built-in CD player. ! Whenthis units blue/white lead is connected to the vehicles auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicles antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To

retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off.

8 En Section Tuner 04 Listening to the radio 1 23 45 This units AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off. AF should be off fornormal tuning operation (refer to page 11). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, MW, LW or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which

frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on.

4 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 1 2Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing either c or d. # If you press and

hold c or d you can skip stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. 5 To perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one secondand release.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(3)

The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. English Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If youpress any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button.

% When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press one of preset tuning buttons 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. Thenumber you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. Thenext time you press the same preset tuning button the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes ! Up to 12 FM stations, 6 for each of the two FM

bands, and 6 MW/LW stations can be stored in memory. ! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. 3Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2 for FM or MW/LW. 4 To perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d.En 9 Section 04 Tuner Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception.

% Press LOCAL/BSM repeatedly to turn local seek tuning on or off. When local seek tuning is on, LOC appears in the display. Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and

once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcastfrequencies you have saved using buttons 16. % Press LOCAL/BSM and hold until the BSM turns on.

BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in the order of their signalstrength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press LOCAL/BSM. 10 En Section RDS 05 Introduction of RDS operation 1 23

4 % Press DISPLAY.

Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Program service namePTY information Frequency PTY (program type ID code)information is listed on page 13. English RDS (radio data system) is a system for providing information along with FM broadcasts. This inaudible information

provides such features as program service name, program type, traffic announcement standby and automatic tuning, intended to aid radio listeners in findingand is tuning in to a desired station. 1 Program service name Shows the name of broadcast program. 2 AF indicator Shows when AF (alternative frequenciessearch) function is on. 3 TA indicator Shows when TA (traffic announcement standby) function is on. 4 TP indicator Shows when a TP station is t TA again. 3Use VOLUME to adjust the TA volume when a traffic announcement begins. The newly set volume is stored in memory and recalled for subsequent traffic

announcements. 4 Press TA while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announcement.

The tuner returns to the original source but remains in the standby mode until TA is pressed again. # You can also cancel the announcement by pressingSOURCE, BAND, a, b, c or d while a traffic announcement is being received. Notes ! The system switches back to the original source following trafficannouncement reception. ! Only TP and enhanced other networks TP stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when TA is on. Specific EASY MUSOTH MUS JAZZ COUNTRY NAT MUS OLDIES FOLK MUS L.CLASS CLASSIC EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED CHILDREN SOCIALRELIGION PHONE IN TOURING LEISURE DOCUMENT Type of program Easy listening music Non-categorized music Jazz Country music National music

Oldies music, golden oldies Folk music Light classical music Serious classical music Educational programs All radio plays and serials National or regionalculture Nature, science and technology Light entertainment Childrens Social affairs Religious affairs or services Phone In Travel programs, not forannouncements about traffic problems Hobbies and recreational activities Documentaries English PTY list Specific NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORTWEATHER FINANCE POP MUS ROCK MUS Type of program News Current affairs General information and advice Sports Weather reports/meteorologicalinformation Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc. Popular music Contemporary modern music En 13 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD ! Ifan error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 25. 1 2 Repeating play Repeat play lets

you hear the same track over again. % Press 5 repeatedly to turn repeat play on or off. When repeat play is on, RPT appears in the display.1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Insert a CD into the

CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc.

# After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # If you perform track search orfast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets

you play back tracks on the CD in a random order.

% Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off. When random play is on, RDM appears in the display. 3 To perform fast forward or reverse, press andhold c or d. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the searchmethod on the next page.) 4 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the

start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12cm or 8-cm (single) CD at atime.

Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs. ! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets youhear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 14En Section Built-in CD Player 06 2 When you find the desired track press 3 to turn scan play off. # After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page.

2 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks on a disc. English Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. % Press 6repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE.

(4)

# If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. # If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls thefirst track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of

the disc. Selecting the search method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks.% Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGHSearching every 10 tracks Using compression and BMX Using the COMP (compression) and BMX functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of this

player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMXcontrols sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the

playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % Press 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings:COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX 2 Searching every 10 tracks in the current disc If a disc contains over 10 tracks, you can search every

10 tracks. When a disc contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play.

En 15 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discsmay contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CDTEXT discs support the functions listed below. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeDISC TTL(disc title)ART NAME (disc artist name)TRK TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXTdisc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T-TTL). Note You can scroll to the left the title by pressing and holding DISPLAY. 16 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV

Player 07 Playing MP3/WMA/WAV # To return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playbackcommences with folder 02.

English 12 3 4 5 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 1 Folder number indicator Shows the number of folder currently playing. 2 MP3indicator Shows when the MP3 file is playing. 3 WMA indicator Shows when the WMA file is playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of

the current track (file).

5 Track number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. ! If a track number 100 to 199 is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator willlight. ! If a track number 200 or more is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator will blink. 1 Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. Playback

will automatically start.

# This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached. # If you selectROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 19.) 5 To skipback or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressingagain will skip to the previous track. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE

CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/ WMA/WAV and CD-DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback ofMP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc.

! The built-in CD player can play back an MP3/ WMA/WAV file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 26 for files that can be played back.) ! Do not insertanything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up CD playback and the sound being issued. When beingread in, FRMTREAD is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains

no files, playback commences with folder 02.) # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc. # After a CD-ROM has been inserted, press SOURCE to select thebuilt-in CD player.

# You can eject a CD-ROM by pressing EJECT. 2 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Press a or b to select a folder. # You cannot select a folder thatdoes not have an MP3/WMA/WAV file recorded in it. En 17 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate)

files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used.

! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NO AUDIO is displayed. ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digitalrights management (DRM) , SKIPPED is displayed while the protected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT isdisplayed. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If an error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player

error messages on page 25.

Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FRPT (folder repeat) and disc repeat. 1Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off. When random play is on, RDM appears inthe display. # If you turn random play on during FRPT, FRDM appears in the display. Repeating play For MP3/WMA/WAV playback, there are three repeat

play ranges: FRPT (folder repeat), RPT (one-track repeat) and disc repeat. % Press 5 to select the repeat range. Press 5 until the desired repeat rangeappears in the display. ! RPT Repeat just the current track ! FRPT Repeat the current folder ! Play time (e.

g., 0123) Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. ! If you perform track searchor fast forward/reverse during RPT, the repeat play range changes to FRPT. ! When FRPT is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder.

Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FRPT (folder repeat), the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. Whenyou are using disc repeat, the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on

this page.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(5)

2 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display.

The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. # If you turn scan play on during FRPT, FSCN appears inthe display. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) press 3 to turn scan play off. # After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 18 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV Player 07 Pausing MP3/WMA/WAV playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of theMP3/WMA/WAV.

% Press 6 repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. trackof the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the folder.# If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks aftersearching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. English Using compression and BMX Selecting the search

method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks. % Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 untilthe desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGH Searching every 10 tracks Using the COMP (compression)and BMX functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of this player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balancesthe output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMX controls sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as

you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to.

% Press 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX2 Searching every 10 tracks in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search every 10 tracks. When one folder contains a lotof tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page. 2Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last

Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc Text information recorded on a MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAYrepeatedly to switch between the following settings: En 19 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)TRK TTL(track title)ART NAME (artist name)ALBM TTL (album title) COMMENT (comment)Bit rate Note You can scroll to the left the text information by pressingand holding DISPLAY. # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not displayed even after switching to bit

rate.

(VBR will be displayed.) # When playing back WMA files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the average bit rate value is displayed. # If specificinformation has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME).

# With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Note You can scroll to the leftthe text information by pressing and holding DISPLAY. Displaying text information on WAV disc You can display text information recorded on a WAV disc. %

Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)Sampling frequency #You can only play back WAV files in the frequencies 16, 22.

05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded. 20 En SectionAudio Adjustments 08 Introduction of audio adjustments 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. FAD F15 FAD R15 is displayed as the front/ rear

speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. English 1 2 3 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows whencustom equalizer curve is currently selected. 2 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status.

3 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly toswitch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)EQ (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)FIE (front image enhancer)SLA (source leveladjustment) 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. BAL L 9 BAL R 9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Usingthe equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are sixstored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCALCUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA.

# If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. # To return to the display ofeach source, press BAND. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats.

1 # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. Press AUDIO to select FAD. ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve thatyou create. ! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by

switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve.

En 21 Section 08 Audio Adjustments % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT ! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve

will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. 1 Press AUDIO and hold untilfrequency and the Q factor (e.g.

, F- 80 Q 1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency.Low: 4080100160 (Hz) Mid: 2005001k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select the desired Q factor. 2N1N1W2W Adjusting equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(6)

! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve withCUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. 1 Press AUDIO to select EQ. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust.EQ-L (low)EQ-M (mid)EQ-H (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. +6 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting

loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. # You can then selectanother band and adjust the level. Fine-adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of eachcurrently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H). 2 Press a to turn loudness on. LOUD indicator is displayed. # To turn loudness off, press b. # You can

also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS.

Level (dB) Q=2N Center frequency Frequency (Hz) Q=2W 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low)MID (mid)HI (high) 22 En Section AudioAdjustments 08 Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.

I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers,limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.

I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent asudden increase in volume. ! The MW/LW tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with

the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA.

English 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. SLA +4 SLA 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. 1 2 Press AUDIO to selectFIE. Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E.

off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. 100160250 (Hz) Notes ! After turning the F.I.E.

function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 21) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced. ! Turn the F.I.E. functionoff when using a 2speaker system.

Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switchingbetween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. En 23 Section 09 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. Press c to select 50 (50 kHz). Press d to select 100 (100 kHz). 1 Initial settings lets you perform initial setup ofdifferent settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press SOURCE and hold

until FM appears in the display. 3 Press AUDIO to display the function names.

Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM (FM tuning step)A-PI (Auto PI Seek) SAVE (Power save) Use the followinginstructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down SOURCE until

the unit turns off. Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a different station with the same programming, even during preset recall. 1Press AUDIO to select A-PI. 2 Press a or b to turn the Auto PI seek on or off. Saving the battery consumption It is possible to save the battery consumptionwhen this unit is turned off. After one minute of turning off this unit, this unit will be switched into power save mode. ! You cannot insert and eject a disc while

this unit is in power save mode. ! You can only use SOURCE while this unit is in power save mode.

Important Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or TA is on, the tuning step automaticallychanges to 100 kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. ! The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning. 1 Press

AUDIO to select FM.

When you disconnect a battery in order to replace it, this mode is turned off. When installing this unit in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory)position on the ignition switch, the vehicle battery may be drained depending on a connection method. After checking the connection method, turn this mode

on if needed. 1 Press AUDIO to select SAVE. 2 Press a or b to turn power save on or off.

24 En Appendix Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer ServiceCenter, be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action Clean disc. Replace disc. Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source,

then back to the CD player. CD player and care English ! Use only CDs that have either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as shown below.ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, Scratched disc 17, 30 ERROR-10, 11, Electrical or me12, 17, 30, A0 chanical ! Use only normal, roundCDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ERROR-22, 23 The CD format Replace disc. cannotbe played back All tracks are skip tracks Replace disc. ERROR-44 Sound muting Sound from this unit is muted automatically in the following cases: ! When a

call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit.

! When the voice guidance is output from a Pioneer navigation unit connected to this unit. The sound is turned off, MUTE is displayed and no audioadjustments, except volume control, are possible. Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice guidance is ended. ! Check all CDs for

cracks, scratches or warping before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touchingthe recorded (non-printed) surface when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose

the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center. ! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside theCD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to malfunction. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to

allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

En 25 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have beenfinalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(7)

, on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environment.Please record with the correct format.

(For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight,high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this

unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skipinformation are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when

you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! MP3, WMA and WAV files !MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to anaudio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later.

WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format for Windows. With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operatecorrectly. With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. This unit allowsplayback of MP3/WMA/ WAV files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with theRomeo and Joliet file system can be played back. It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. MP3/WMA/WAV files are not compatible

with packet write data transfer. The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav), is 64, from the first character. The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. In case of files recordedaccording to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 characters can be displayed. When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA)

such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA/WAV and CD-DA.The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expectedsequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However, there also is some writing software which permits setting ofthe playback order. 26 En Appendix Additional Information ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discsare converted to MP3/WMA/ WAV files and burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/ CD-ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each

one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD.

Important ! When naming an MP3/WMA/WAV file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav). ! This unit plays back files with thefilename extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav) as an MP3/ WMA/WAV file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than

MP3/WMA/WAV files. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7, 7.

1, 8 and 9. ! You can only play back WMA files in the frequencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with anincreased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) or from 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR), but in order to be able toenjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit doesnt support the following formats. Windows MediaAudio 9 Professional (5.1ch) Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless Windows Media Audio 9 Voice English MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible

with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.

1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver.2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.

x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz samplingfrequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. !The sound quality of MP3 files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in

order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

WAV additional information ! This unit plays back WAV files encoded in Linear PCM (LPCM) format or MS ADPCM format. ! You can only play back WAVfiles in the frequencies 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display maybe rounded. ! The sound quality of WAV files generally becomes better with a larger number of quantization bits. This unit can play recordings with 8 and 16

(LPCM) or 4 (MS ADPCM) quantization bits, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with the largernumber of quantization bits. En 27 Appendix Additional Information About folders and MP3/ WMA/WAV files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA/

WAV files on it is shown below.

Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. ! MP3/WMA/WAV files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is adelay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play

back up to 99 folders on one disc.

1 2 3 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to checkfolders that do not include MP3/WMA/WAV files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number.) 28 En Appendix Additional

Information Terms Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second).

The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the betterthe sound. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artists

name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tagediting functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

(8)

ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for thefollowing two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals

and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters.

) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark . and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies.Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse codemodulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. m3u Playlists created using the

WINAMP software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a workinggroup (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization).

MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential pulse codemodulation, which is the signal recording system used for the multimedia software of Microsoft Corporation. Multi-session Multi-session is a recordingmethod that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated

as a single unit or session.

Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in theoverall sound quality; the higher the bit-depth, the better the sound quality. However, increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore

storage space required. En 29 English Appendix Additional Information Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the timerequired for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs.

VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to theneeds of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality. WAV WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format

for Windows. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, orregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 30 En Appendix Additional Information Specifications General

Power source .....

......

... 14.4 V DC (10.8 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ...

....... Negative type Max.current consumption ..................

... 10.0 A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis .......... 178 50 157 mm Nose .............. 188 58 19 mm D Chassis ............ 178 50 162 mm Nose ............170 48 14 mm Weight ................. 1.3 kg Usable discs .........

(9)

...

... Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency ... 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits ...................

.. 16; linear Frequency characteristics ... 5 20,000 Hz (1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ......

94 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range ......

...

... 92 dB (1 kHz) Number of channels ......

.... 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ....

MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ... Ver.7, 7.1, 8, 9 (2ch audio) WAV signal format ....

...

... Linear PCM & MS ADPCM English Maximum power output .... 50 W 4 Continuous power output ... 27 W 4 (DIN 45324, +B=14.

4 V) Load impedance ......

...

.. 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance .....................

... 2.2 V/1 kW Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency .......

.. 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor ......

...

.. 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ................. 12dB Mid Frequency .........200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor ......

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ....

(10)

5k Hz Q Factor .........

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ......

......

.. 12dB Loudness contour Low ................ +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB (10 kHz) Mid ................ +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ...............

.... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: 30 dB) Audio Frequency range ....

...

. 87.5 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity .....

...

.... 8 dBf (0.7 V/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ...10 dBf (0.9 V/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ....

...

... 75 dB (IEC-A network) Distortion .......

.........

... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) Frequency response .........30 15,000 Hz (3 dB) Stereo separation ......45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz) Selectivity ...............

. 80 dB (200 kHz) FM tuner MW tuner Frequency range .......... 531 1,602 kHz (9 kHz) Usable sensitivity ........... 18 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ....

(11)

......... 153 281 kHz Usable sensitivity ............. 30 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ......

.. 65 dB (IEC-A network) Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. CD player System .....

............

... Compact disc audio system En 31 Contenido Gracias por haber comprado este producto Pioneer. Lea con detenimiento estas instrucciones sobre elfuncionamiento del aparato, para que pueda darle el mejor uso posible. Una vez que las haya ledo, guarde este manual en un lugar seguro para consultarlo

en el futuro. Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad 34 Caractersticas 34 Acerca de WMA 35 Proteccin del producto contra robo 35 Extraccin de lacartula 35 Colocacin de la cartula 35 Qu es cada cosa Unidad principal 36 Mando a distancia opcional 37 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y

seleccin de una fuente 38 Apagado de la unidad 38 Sintonizador Para escuchar la radio 39 Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias 39 Sintonizacin deseales fuertes 40 Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes 40 RDS Introduccin a la operacin RDS 41 Cambio de la visualizacin RDS 41Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY 41 Seleccin de frecuencias alternativas 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI automtica para emisoraspresintonizadas 42 Limitacin de las emisoras para programacin regional 42 Recepcin de anuncios de trfico 43 Lista PTY 43 Reproductor de CD incorporadoReproduccin de un CD 45 Repeticin de reproduccin 45 Reproduccin de las pistas en un orden aleatorio 45 Exploracin de las pistas de un CD 46 Pausa de lareproduccin de un CD 46 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 46 Bsqueda cada 10 pistas en el disco actual 46 Uso de la compresin y BMX 47 Uso de las funciones

CD TEXT 47 Reproductor de MP3/WMA/WAV Reproduccin de ficheros MP3/WMA/ WAV 48 Repeticin de reproduccin 49 Reproduccin de las pistas en unorden aleatorio 49 Exploracin de carpetas y pistas 50 Pausa de la reproduccin de un MP3/WMA/ WAV 50 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 50 Bsqueda cada10 pistas en la carpeta actual 50 Uso de la compresin y BMX 51 Visualizacin de informacin de texto de un disco MP3/WMA 51 Visualizacin de informacin detexto de un disco WAV 51 Ajustes de audio Introduccin a los ajustes de audio 52 Uso del ajuste del balance 52 Uso del ecualizador 52 Llamada de las curvasde ecualizacin 52 Ajuste de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 32 Es Contenido Ajuste preciso de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 Ajuste de la sonoridad 54 Mejora de

imagen frontal (F.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(12)

I.

E.) 54 Ajuste de los niveles de la fuente 54 Ajustes iniciales Configuracin de los ajustes iniciales 55 Ajuste del paso de sintona de FM 55 Cambio de labsqueda PI automtica 55 Ahorro del consumo de la batera 56 Informacin adicional Comprensin de los mensajes de error del reproductor de CD incorporado57 Silenciamiento del sonido 57 Reproductor de CD y cuidados 57 Discos CD-R/CD-RW 58 Ficheros MP3, WMA y WAV 58 Informacin adicional sobre MP3

59 Informacin adicional sobre WMA 60 Informacin adicional sobre WAV 60 Acerca de las carpetas y los ficheros MP3/ WMA/WAV 60 Glosario 62Especificaciones 64 Es 33 Espaol Seccin 01 Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad Las frecuencias del sintonizador de esta unidad estn asignadas para su

uso en Europa Occidental, Asia, Medio Oriente, frica y Oceana. El uso en otras reas puede causar una recepcin deficiente. Las funciones RDS (sistema dedatos de radio) slo se pueden utilizar en reas con emisoras FM que transmiten seales RDS. Caractersticas Reproduccin de CD Se pueden reproducir discoscompactos de msica, CD-R y CD-RW. Reproduccin de ficheros MP3 Se pueden reproducir ficheros MP3 grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabacionessegn la norma ISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). ! La venta de este producto slo otorga una licencia para su uso privado, no comercial. No otorga ninguna licencia ni

concede ningn derecho para utilizar este producto en transmisiones comerciales (es decir, lucrativas) en tiempo real (terrestres, satelitales, por cable y/o porcualquier otro medio), transmisiones/streaming por Internet, intranets y/u otras redes o en otros sistemas de distribucin de contenido electrnico, como por

ejemplo, aplicaciones de audio pago (pay-audio) o a solicitud (audio-on-demand). Se necesita una licencia independiente para su uso comercial. Paraobtener ms informacin, visite el sitio http://www.

mp3licensing.com. Reproduccin de ficheros WMA Se pueden reproducir ficheros WMA grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones segn la normaISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). Reproduccin de ficheros WAV Se pueden reproducir ficheros WAV grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones en formatos

LPCM (PCM lineal) o MS ADPCM). ! No permita que esta unidad entre en contacto con lquidos, ya que ello puede producir una descarga elctrica.Adems, el contacto con lquidos puede causar daos en la unidad, humo y recalentamiento. ! Hay pegada una etiqueta CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT en la parte

inferior de esta unidad. PRECAUCIN CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ! El CarStereo-Pass Pioneer es para usarse slo en Alemania. ! Conserve este manual amano para que pueda consultar los procedimientos de operacin y las precauciones cuando sea necesario. ! Mantenga siempre el volumen lo suficientemente

bajo como para que pueda escuchar los sonidos que provienen del exterior del vehculo.

! Proteja esta unidad de la humedad. ! Si se desconecta o se descarga la batera, la memoria preajustada se borrar y deber reprogramarla. ! En caso de queeste producto no funcione correctamente, comunquese con su concesionario o el Servicio Tcnico Oficial Pioneer ms prximo a su domicilio. 34 Es SeccinAntes de comenzar 01 Acerca de WMA Importante ! Nunca presione ni sujete el display y los botones con fuerza excesiva al extraer o colocar la cartula. !Evite someter la cartula a impactos excesivos. ! Mantenga la cartula fuera del alcance de la luz solar directa y no la exponga a altas temperaturas. Espaol Ellogo de Windows Media" impreso en la caja indica que esta unidad puede reproducir datos WMA. WMA es la abreviatura de Windows Media Audio y alude a

una tecnologa de compresin de audio desarrollada por Microsoft Corporation. Los datos WMA se pueden codificar utilizando Windows Media Player versin7 o posterior. Microsoft, Windows Media y el logo de Windows son marcas comerciales o registradas de Microsoft Corporation en los EE.UU. y/o en otros pases. Notas ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que esta unidad no funcionecorrectamente. ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que no se visualicen correctamente los nombres delbumes y dems informacin de texto. Extraccin de la cartula 1 Presione DETACH para soltar la cartula. Presione DETACH y el lado derecho del panel sesuelta de la unidad principal. 2 Tome la cartula y extrigala. Tome el lado derecho de la cartula y tire de l hacia la izquierda. La cartula saldr de la unidad

principal. 3 Coloque la cartula en la carcasa protectora provista para guardarla de manera segura.

Colocacin de la cartula Proteccin del producto contra robo El panel delantero se puede extraer de la unidad principal y almacenarse en su carcasaprotectora, provista como una medida antirrobo. 1 Coloque la cartula de modo plano contra la unidad principal. 2 Presione la cartula hacia la cara de launidad principal hasta que se asiente firmemente. Es 35 Seccin 02 Qu es cada cosa 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Unidad principal 1 Botn TA Presione para activar

o desactivar la funcin TA. Presione y mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin AF.

2 Ranura de carga de discos Introduzca el disco para reproducirlo. 3 Botn EJECT Presione este botn para expulsar un CD del reproductor de CDincorporado. 4 Botn AUDIO Presione este botn para seleccionar los diversos controles de calidad del sonido. 5 Botn DISPLAY Presione este botn paraseleccionar diferentes visualizaciones. 6 Botones a/b/c/d Presione estos botones para utilizar los controles de sintonizacin por bsqueda manual, avance rpido,

retroceso y bsqueda de pista.

Tambin se usan para controlar las funciones. 7 Botn LOUDNESS Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la sonoridad. 8 Botn DETACH Presione estebotn para extraer la cartula de la unidad principal. 9 Botn BAND Presione para seleccionar entre dos bandas FM y la banda MW/LW, y cancelar el modo de

control de funciones. a Botn LOCAL/BSM Presione para activar o desactivar la funcin local. Mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin BSM.b Botones 16 Presione para la sintonizacin preajustada. c Botn SOURCE Esta unidad se enciende al seleccionar una fuente. Presione este botn para

visualizar todas las fuentes disponibles. d VOLUME Haga girar el control para aumentar o disminuir el volumen.

e Botn EQ Presione este botn para seleccionar las diversas curvas de ecualizacin. 36 Es Seccin Qu es cada cosa 02 f 9 k j i g 4 h Espaol 6 Mando a distanciaopcional El mando a distancia de volante CD-R300 se vende por separado. Las funciones se utilizan de la misma manera que al usar los botones de la unidad

principal. Consulte la explicacin de la unidad principal acerca del uso de cada botn, con excepcin de ATT, que se explica a continuacin. f Botn VOLUMEPresione este botn para aumentar o disminuir el volumen. g Botn ATT Presione este botn para disminuir rpidamente el nivel de volumen alrededor del 90%.

Presinelo una vez ms para volver al nivel de volumen original.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(13)

h Botn TUNER Presione este botn para seleccionar el sintonizador como la fuente. i Botn PAUSE Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la pausa. jBotn CD Presione para seleccionar el lector de CD incorporado como la fuente.

k Botn FUNCTION No se utiliza. Es 37 Seccin 03 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y seleccin de una fuente Puede seleccionar la fuente quedesea escuchar. Para cambiar al reproductor de CD incorporado, coloque un disco en la unidad (consulte la pgina 45). % Al utilizar la unidad principal,

presione SOURCE para seleccionar una fuente. Presione SOURCE repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientes fuentes: Lector de CDincorporadoSintonizador Cuando se selecciona una fuente, la unidad se enciende.

% Al utilizar el mando a distancia, presione TUNER o CD para seleccionar una fuente. Presione cada botn repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientesfuentes: TUNER: SintonizadorFuentes desactivadas CD: Reproductor de CD incorporado Fuentes desactivadas Notas ! Si no hay un disco cargado en la

unidad, la fuente no cambiar al lector de CD incorporado. ! Si el cable azul/blanco de esta unidad est conectado al control del terminal de antena delvehculo, la antena se extiende cuando se enciende el equipo. Para retraer la antena, apague el equipo. Apagado de la unidad % Presione SOURCE y

mantenga presionado hasta que se apague la unidad.

38 Es Seccin Sintonizador 04 Para escuchar la radio 4 Para utilizar la sintonizacin manual, presione brevemente c o d. 5 Para utilizar la sintonizacin porbsqueda, presione c o d y mantenga presionado durante aproximadamente un segundo, y libere el botn. El sintonizador explorar las frecuencias hasta queencuentre una emisora con seales de suficiente intensidad como para asegurar una buena recepcin. 1 23 45 Se puede activar y desactivar la funcin AF(bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) de esta unidad. Se debe desactivar la funcin AF para la sintonizacin normal (consulte la pgina 42). 1 Indicador debanda Muestra la banda en que la radio est sintonizada: MW, LW o FM. 2 Indicador de frecuencia Muestra la frecuencia en que la radio est sintonizada. 3

Indicador LOC Aparece cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada. 4 Indicador de estreo (5) Muestra que la frecuencia seleccionada se esttransmitiendo en estreo. 5 Indicador del nmero de presintona Muestra la memoria seleccionada.

1 Presione SOURCE para seleccionar el sintonizador. 2 Utilice VOLUME para ajustar el nivel de sonido. 3 Presione BAND para seleccionar una banda.Presione BAND hasta que se visualice la banda deseada: F1, F2 para FM o MW/LW. Espaol 39 # Se puede cancelar la sintonizacin por bsqueda presionando

brevemente c o d. # Si presiona c o d y mantiene presionado, podr saltar las emisoras. La sintonizacin por bsqueda comienza inmediatamente despus de quelibera el botn. Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias Si se presiona cualquiera de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, se pueden almacenar con

facilidad hasta seis frecuencias de emisoras para llamarlas con posterioridad presionando un solo botn. % Cuando encuentre la frecuencia que deseaalmacenar en la memoria, presione uno de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16 y mantngalo presionado hasta que el nmero de presintona deje de

destellar. El nmero seleccionado destellar en el indicador del nmero de presintona y quedar iluminado.

Se ha almacenado en la memoria la frecuencia de la emisora de radio seleccionada. La prxima vez que presione el mismo botn de ajuste de presintonas, lamemoria recordar la frecuencia de la emisora. Es Seccin 04 Sintonizador Notas ! En la memoria se pueden almacenar hasta 12 emisoras FM, 6 para cadauna de las dos bandas FM, y 6 emisoras MW/LW. ! Tambin se pueden usar los botones a y b para llamar las frecuencias de las emisoras de radio asignadas a

los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. # Para cancelar el proceso de almacenamiento, presione LOCAL/BSM.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM y mantenga presionado hasta que se active la funcin BSM. BSM comienza a destellar. Mientras BSM est destellando, las seisfrecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes se almacenarn en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, ordenadas segn la intensidad de las seales. Una vezfinalizada la operacin, BSM deja de destellar. Sintonizacin de seales fuertes La sintonizacin por bsqueda local le permite sintonizar slo las emisoras de radio

con seales lo suficientemente fuertes como para asegurar una buena recepcin.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM repetidamente para activar o desactivar la sintonizacin por bsqueda local. Cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada,en el display aparece LOC. Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes La funcin BSM (memoria de las mejores emisoras) le permite almacenar

automticamente seis frecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. Una vez almacenadas, podr sintonizar esasfrecuencias presionando un solo botn. ! Al almacenar frecuencias con la funcin BSM, se pueden reemplazar las frecuencias que ha almacenado con los

botones 16. 40 Es Seccin RDS 05 Introduccin a la operacin RDS Cambio de la visualizacin RDS Cuando se sintoniza una emisora RDS, se visualiza elnombre del servicio de programa. Puede ver la frecuencia que est sintonizada, si as lo desea. % Presione DISPLAY. Presione DISPLAY repetidamente para

cambiar entre los siguientes ajustes: Nombre del servicio de programaInformacin PTYFrecuencia En la pgina 43 se indica la informacin PTY (cdigo deidentificacin de tipo de programa). 1 23 4 RDS (sistema de datos de radio) es un sistema que ofrece informacin junto con las transmisiones FM.Esta informacin no audible brinda funciones tales como nombre del servicio de programa, tipo de programa, espera por anuncio de trfico y sintonizacin

automtica, a fin de ayudar a los radioescuchas a encontrar y sintonizar la emisora deseada. 1 Nombre del servicio de programa Muestra el nombre delprograma que se est transmitiendo. 2 Indicador AF Aparece cuando la funcin AF (bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) est activada. 3 Indicador TA Aparece

cuando la funcin TA (espera por anuncio de trfico) est activada. 4 Indicador TP Aparece cuando una emisora TP est sintonizada. Notas ! Es posible que notodas las emisoras suministren el servicio RDS. ! Las funciones RDS como AF y TA slo se activan cuando la radio est sintonizada en una emisora RDS.Espaol 41 # La informacin PTY y la frecuencia de la emisora actual aparecen en el display durante ocho segundos. Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY

La alarma PTY es un cdigo PTY especial para anuncios de emergencias tales como un desastre natural. Cuando el sintonizador recibe el cdigo de alarma deradio, ALARM aparece en el display y el volumen se ajusta segn el volumen de TA.

Cuando la emisora deja de transmitir el anuncio de emergencia, el sistema vuelve a la fuente anterior. ! Se puede cancelar un anuncio de emergenciapresionando TA.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

Adjustinginitialsettings

1

Initialsettingsletsyouperforminitialsetupof

differentsettingsforthisunit.

1Functiondisplay

Showsthefunctionstatus.

1PressSOURCEandholduntiltheunit

turnsoff.

2PressSOURCEandholduntilFMap-

pearsinthedisplay.

3PressAUDIOtodisplaythefunction

names.

PressAUDIOrepeatedlytoswitchbetween

thefollowingsettings:

FM(FMtuningstep)A-PI(AutoPISeek)

SAVE(Powersave)

Usethefollowinginstructionstooperateeach

particularsetting.

#Tocancelinitialsettings,pressBAND.

#Youcanalsocancelinitialsettingsbyholding

downSOURCEuntiltheunitturnsoff.

SettingtheFMtuningstep

NormallytheFMtuningstepemployedby

seektuningis50kHz.WhenAForTAison,

thetuningstepautomaticallychangesto100

kHz.Itmaybepreferabletosetthetuningstep

to50kHzwhenAFison.

!Thetuningstepremainsat50kHzduring

manualtuning.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFM.

2PresscordtoselecttheFMtuning

step.

Pressctoselect50(50kHz).Pressdtose-

lect100(100kHz).

SwitchingAutoPISeek

Theunitcanautomaticallysearchforadiffer-

entstationwiththesameprogramming,even

duringpresetrecall.

1PressAUDIOtoselectA-PI.

2PressaorbtoturntheAutoPIseek

onoroff.

Savingthebattery

consumption

Itispossibletosavethebatteryconsumption

whenthisunitisturnedoff.Afteroneminute

ofturningoffthisunit,thisunitwillbe

switchedintopowersavemode.

!Youcannotinsertandejectadiscwhile

thisunitisinpowersavemode.

!YoucanonlyuseSOURCEwhilethisunitis

inpowersavemode.

Important

Whenyoudisconnectabatteryinordertoreplace

it,thismodeisturnedoff.Wheninstallingthis

unitinavehiclethatdoesnothaveanACC(ac-

cessory)positionontheignitionswitch,thevehi-

clebatterymaybedraineddependingona

connectionmethod.Aftercheckingtheconnec-

tionmethod,turnthismodeonifneeded.

1PressAUDIOtoselectSAVE.

2Pressaorbtoturnpowersaveonor

off.

InitialSettings

En

24

Section

09

background image

About this unit

The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo-

cated for use in Western Europe, Asia, the

Middle East, Africa and Oceania. Use in other

areas may result in poor reception. The RDS

(radio data system) function operates only in

areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS sig-

nals.

CAUTION

! Do not allow this unit to come into contact

with liquids. Electrical shock could result.

Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat

could result from contact with liquids.

! A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is affixed

to the bottom of this unit.

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

! The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in

Germany.

! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op-

erating procedures and precautions.

! Always keep the volume low enough so that

you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle.

! Protect this unit from moisture.

! If the battery is disconnected or discharged,

the preset memory will be erased and must be

reprogrammed.

! Should this product fail to operate properly,

contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pio-

neer Service Station.

Features

CD playback

Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.

MP3 file playback

You can play back MP3 files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2

standard recordings).

! Supply of this product only conveys a li-

cense for private, non-commercial use and

does not convey a license nor imply any

right to use this product in any commercial

(i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad-

casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or

any other media), broadcasting/streaming

via internet, intranets and/or other net-

works or in other electronic content distri-

bution systems, such as pay-audio or

audio-on-demand applications. An inde-

pendent license for such use is required.

For details, please visit

http://www.mp3licensing.com.

WMA file playback

You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2

standard recordings).

WAV file playback

You can play back WAV files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (Linear PCM (LPCM)/MS

ADPCM recordings).

About WMA

The Windows Media" logo printed on the box

indicates that this unit can play back WMA

data.

Before You Start

En

4

Section

01


Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 - you

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER DEH-4700MP user guide

(1)

You can read the recommendations in the user guide, the technical guide or the installation guide for PIONEER DEH-4700MP.

You'll find the answers to all your questions on the PIONEER DEH-4700MP in the user manual (information, specifications, safety

advice, size, accessories, etc.). Detailed instructions for use are in the User's Guide.

User manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

User guide PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Operating instructions PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instructions for use PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instruction manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

(2)

Manual abstract:

@@Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. @@! A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is affixed to the bottomof this unit. CAUTION MP3 file playback You can play back MP3 files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). !

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in anycommercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent

license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.

com. WMA file playback You can play back WMA files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). WAV fileplayback You can play back WAV files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (Linear PCM (LPCM)/MS ADPCM recordings). CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT !

The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in Germany. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! Protect this unit from moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or

discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! Should this product fail to operate properly, contact your dealer or nearestauthorized Pioneer Service Station. About WMA Features CD playback Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.

The Windows Media" logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. 4 En Section Before You Start 01 WMA is short for WindowsMedia Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows MediaPlayer version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly. ! With some applications used toencode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. Grab the right side of thefront panel and pull away to the left. The front panel will be detached from the head unit. English 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for

safe keeping.

Attaching the front panel 1 Place the front panel flat against the head unit. 2 Press the front panel into the face of the head unit until it is firmly seated.Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft. Important !

Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attaching. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep thefront panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press DETACH to release the front panel. Press DETACH and the rightside of the panel is released from the head unit. En 5 Section 02 Whats What 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Head unit 1 TA button Press to turn TA function on or off.

Press and hold to turn AF function on or off.

2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. 3 EJECT button Press to eject a CD from your built-in CD player. 4 AUDIO button Press to select various soundquality controls. 5 DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. 6 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search

controls.

Also used for controlling functions. 7 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 8 DETACH button Press to remove the front panel from the headunit. 9 BAND button Press to select among two FM and MW/LW bands and cancel the control mode of functions. a LOCAL/BSM button Press to turn local

function on or off.

Press and hold to turn BSM function on or off. b 16 buttons Press for preset tuning. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press tocycle through all the available sources. d VOLUME Rotate it to increase or decrease the volume. e EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves.Optional remote control The steering remote control CD-R300 is sold separately. 6 En Section Whats What 02 f English 9 k j i g 4 h 6 Operation is the same

as when using the buttons on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which isexplained below. f VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume.

g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h TUNER button Press to selectthe tuner as the source. i PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. j CD button Press to select the built-in CD player as the source. k FUNCTION buttonNot used. En 7 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on and selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-inCD player, load a disc in the unit (refer to page 14). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch

between the following sources: Built-in CD playerTuner When you select a source the unit is turned on.

% When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER:TunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playerSources off Notes ! When no disc has been set in the unit, the source will not switch to the built-in CD player. ! Whenthis units blue/white lead is connected to the vehicles auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicles antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To

retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off.

8 En Section Tuner 04 Listening to the radio 1 23 45 This units AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off. AF should be off fornormal tuning operation (refer to page 11). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, MW, LW or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which

frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on.

4 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 1 2Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing either c or d. # If you press and

hold c or d you can skip stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. 5 To perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one secondand release.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(3)

The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. English Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If youpress any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button.

% When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press one of preset tuning buttons 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. Thenumber you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. Thenext time you press the same preset tuning button the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes ! Up to 12 FM stations, 6 for each of the two FM

bands, and 6 MW/LW stations can be stored in memory. ! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. 3Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2 for FM or MW/LW. 4 To perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d.En 9 Section 04 Tuner Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception.

% Press LOCAL/BSM repeatedly to turn local seek tuning on or off. When local seek tuning is on, LOC appears in the display. Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and

once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcastfrequencies you have saved using buttons 16. % Press LOCAL/BSM and hold until the BSM turns on.

BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in the order of their signalstrength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press LOCAL/BSM. 10 En Section RDS 05 Introduction of RDS operation 1 23

4 % Press DISPLAY.

Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Program service namePTY information Frequency PTY (program type ID code)information is listed on page 13. English RDS (radio data system) is a system for providing information along with FM broadcasts. This inaudible information

provides such features as program service name, program type, traffic announcement standby and automatic tuning, intended to aid radio listeners in findingand is tuning in to a desired station. 1 Program service name Shows the name of broadcast program. 2 AF indicator Shows when AF (alternative frequenciessearch) function is on. 3 TA indicator Shows when TA (traffic announcement standby) function is on. 4 TP indicator Shows when a TP station is t TA again. 3Use VOLUME to adjust the TA volume when a traffic announcement begins. The newly set volume is stored in memory and recalled for subsequent traffic

announcements. 4 Press TA while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announcement.

The tuner returns to the original source but remains in the standby mode until TA is pressed again. # You can also cancel the announcement by pressingSOURCE, BAND, a, b, c or d while a traffic announcement is being received. Notes ! The system switches back to the original source following trafficannouncement reception. ! Only TP and enhanced other networks TP stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when TA is on. Specific EASY MUSOTH MUS JAZZ COUNTRY NAT MUS OLDIES FOLK MUS L.CLASS CLASSIC EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED CHILDREN SOCIALRELIGION PHONE IN TOURING LEISURE DOCUMENT Type of program Easy listening music Non-categorized music Jazz Country music National music

Oldies music, golden oldies Folk music Light classical music Serious classical music Educational programs All radio plays and serials National or regionalculture Nature, science and technology Light entertainment Childrens Social affairs Religious affairs or services Phone In Travel programs, not forannouncements about traffic problems Hobbies and recreational activities Documentaries English PTY list Specific NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORTWEATHER FINANCE POP MUS ROCK MUS Type of program News Current affairs General information and advice Sports Weather reports/meteorologicalinformation Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc. Popular music Contemporary modern music En 13 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD ! Ifan error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 25. 1 2 Repeating play Repeat play lets

you hear the same track over again. % Press 5 repeatedly to turn repeat play on or off. When repeat play is on, RPT appears in the display.1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Insert a CD into the

CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc.

# After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # If you perform track search orfast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets

you play back tracks on the CD in a random order.

% Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off. When random play is on, RDM appears in the display. 3 To perform fast forward or reverse, press andhold c or d. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the searchmethod on the next page.) 4 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the

start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12cm or 8-cm (single) CD at atime.

Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs. ! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets youhear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 14En Section Built-in CD Player 06 2 When you find the desired track press 3 to turn scan play off. # After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page.

2 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks on a disc. English Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. % Press 6repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE.

(4)

# If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. # If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls thefirst track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of

the disc. Selecting the search method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks.% Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGHSearching every 10 tracks Using compression and BMX Using the COMP (compression) and BMX functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of this

player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMXcontrols sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the

playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % Press 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings:COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX 2 Searching every 10 tracks in the current disc If a disc contains over 10 tracks, you can search every

10 tracks. When a disc contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play.

En 15 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discsmay contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CDTEXT discs support the functions listed below. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeDISC TTL(disc title)ART NAME (disc artist name)TRK TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXTdisc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T-TTL). Note You can scroll to the left the title by pressing and holding DISPLAY. 16 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV

Player 07 Playing MP3/WMA/WAV # To return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playbackcommences with folder 02.

English 12 3 4 5 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 1 Folder number indicator Shows the number of folder currently playing. 2 MP3indicator Shows when the MP3 file is playing. 3 WMA indicator Shows when the WMA file is playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of

the current track (file).

5 Track number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. ! If a track number 100 to 199 is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator willlight. ! If a track number 200 or more is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator will blink. 1 Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. Playback

will automatically start.

# This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached. # If you selectROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 19.) 5 To skipback or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressingagain will skip to the previous track. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE

CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/ WMA/WAV and CD-DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback ofMP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts at the first track on the disc.

! The built-in CD player can play back an MP3/ WMA/WAV file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 26 for files that can be played back.) ! Do not insertanything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up CD playback and the sound being issued. When beingread in, FRMTREAD is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains

no files, playback commences with folder 02.) # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc. # After a CD-ROM has been inserted, press SOURCE to select thebuilt-in CD player.

# You can eject a CD-ROM by pressing EJECT. 2 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Press a or b to select a folder. # You cannot select a folder thatdoes not have an MP3/WMA/WAV file recorded in it. En 17 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate)

files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used.

! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NO AUDIO is displayed. ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digitalrights management (DRM) , SKIPPED is displayed while the protected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT isdisplayed. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If an error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player

error messages on page 25.

Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FRPT (folder repeat) and disc repeat. 1Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off. When random play is on, RDM appears inthe display. # If you turn random play on during FRPT, FRDM appears in the display. Repeating play For MP3/WMA/WAV playback, there are three repeat

play ranges: FRPT (folder repeat), RPT (one-track repeat) and disc repeat. % Press 5 to select the repeat range. Press 5 until the desired repeat rangeappears in the display. ! RPT Repeat just the current track ! FRPT Repeat the current folder ! Play time (e.

g., 0123) Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. ! If you perform track searchor fast forward/reverse during RPT, the repeat play range changes to FRPT. ! When FRPT is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder.

Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FRPT (folder repeat), the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. Whenyou are using disc repeat, the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on

this page.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(5)

2 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display.

The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. # If you turn scan play on during FRPT, FSCN appears inthe display. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) press 3 to turn scan play off. # After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 18 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV Player 07 Pausing MP3/WMA/WAV playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of theMP3/WMA/WAV.

% Press 6 repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. trackof the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the folder.# If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks aftersearching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. English Using compression and BMX Selecting the search

method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks. % Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 untilthe desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGH Searching every 10 tracks Using the COMP (compression)and BMX functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of this player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balancesthe output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMX controls sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as

you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to.

% Press 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX2 Searching every 10 tracks in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search every 10 tracks. When one folder contains a lotof tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page. 2Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last

Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc Text information recorded on a MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAYrepeatedly to switch between the following settings: En 19 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)TRK TTL(track title)ART NAME (artist name)ALBM TTL (album title) COMMENT (comment)Bit rate Note You can scroll to the left the text information by pressingand holding DISPLAY. # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not displayed even after switching to bit

rate.

(VBR will be displayed.) # When playing back WMA files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the average bit rate value is displayed. # If specificinformation has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME).

# With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Note You can scroll to the leftthe text information by pressing and holding DISPLAY. Displaying text information on WAV disc You can display text information recorded on a WAV disc. %

Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)Sampling frequency #You can only play back WAV files in the frequencies 16, 22.

05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded. 20 En SectionAudio Adjustments 08 Introduction of audio adjustments 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. FAD F15 FAD R15 is displayed as the front/ rear

speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. English 1 2 3 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows whencustom equalizer curve is currently selected. 2 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status.

3 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly toswitch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)EQ (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)FIE (front image enhancer)SLA (source leveladjustment) 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. BAL L 9 BAL R 9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Usingthe equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are sixstored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCALCUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA.

# If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. # To return to the display ofeach source, press BAND. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats.

1 # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. Press AUDIO to select FAD. ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve thatyou create. ! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by

switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve.

En 21 Section 08 Audio Adjustments % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT ! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve

will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. 1 Press AUDIO and hold untilfrequency and the Q factor (e.g.

, F- 80 Q 1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency.Low: 4080100160 (Hz) Mid: 2005001k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select the desired Q factor. 2N1N1W2W Adjusting equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(6)

! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve withCUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. 1 Press AUDIO to select EQ. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust.EQ-L (low)EQ-M (mid)EQ-H (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. +6 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting

loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. # You can then selectanother band and adjust the level. Fine-adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of eachcurrently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H). 2 Press a to turn loudness on. LOUD indicator is displayed. # To turn loudness off, press b. # You can

also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS.

Level (dB) Q=2N Center frequency Frequency (Hz) Q=2W 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low)MID (mid)HI (high) 22 En Section AudioAdjustments 08 Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.

I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers,limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.

I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent asudden increase in volume. ! The MW/LW tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with

the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA.

English 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. SLA +4 SLA 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. 1 2 Press AUDIO to selectFIE. Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E.

off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. 100160250 (Hz) Notes ! After turning the F.I.E.

function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 21) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced. ! Turn the F.I.E. functionoff when using a 2speaker system.

Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switchingbetween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. En 23 Section 09 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. Press c to select 50 (50 kHz). Press d to select 100 (100 kHz). 1 Initial settings lets you perform initial setup ofdifferent settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press SOURCE and hold

until FM appears in the display. 3 Press AUDIO to display the function names.

Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM (FM tuning step)A-PI (Auto PI Seek) SAVE (Power save) Use the followinginstructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down SOURCE until

the unit turns off. Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a different station with the same programming, even during preset recall. 1Press AUDIO to select A-PI. 2 Press a or b to turn the Auto PI seek on or off. Saving the battery consumption It is possible to save the battery consumptionwhen this unit is turned off. After one minute of turning off this unit, this unit will be switched into power save mode. ! You cannot insert and eject a disc while

this unit is in power save mode. ! You can only use SOURCE while this unit is in power save mode.

Important Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or TA is on, the tuning step automaticallychanges to 100 kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. ! The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning. 1 Press

AUDIO to select FM.

When you disconnect a battery in order to replace it, this mode is turned off. When installing this unit in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory)position on the ignition switch, the vehicle battery may be drained depending on a connection method. After checking the connection method, turn this mode

on if needed. 1 Press AUDIO to select SAVE. 2 Press a or b to turn power save on or off.

24 En Appendix Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer ServiceCenter, be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action Clean disc. Replace disc. Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source,

then back to the CD player. CD player and care English ! Use only CDs that have either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as shown below.ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, Scratched disc 17, 30 ERROR-10, 11, Electrical or me12, 17, 30, A0 chanical ! Use only normal, roundCDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ERROR-22, 23 The CD format Replace disc. cannotbe played back All tracks are skip tracks Replace disc. ERROR-44 Sound muting Sound from this unit is muted automatically in the following cases: ! When a

call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit.

! When the voice guidance is output from a Pioneer navigation unit connected to this unit. The sound is turned off, MUTE is displayed and no audioadjustments, except volume control, are possible. Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice guidance is ended. ! Check all CDs for

cracks, scratches or warping before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touchingthe recorded (non-printed) surface when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose

the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center. ! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside theCD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to malfunction. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to

allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

En 25 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have beenfinalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(7)

, on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environment.Please record with the correct format.

(For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight,high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this

unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skipinformation are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when

you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! MP3, WMA and WAV files !MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to anaudio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later.

WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format for Windows. With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operatecorrectly. With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. This unit allowsplayback of MP3/WMA/ WAV files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with theRomeo and Joliet file system can be played back. It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. MP3/WMA/WAV files are not compatible

with packet write data transfer. The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav), is 64, from the first character. The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. In case of files recordedaccording to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 characters can be displayed. When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA)

such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA/WAV and CD-DA.The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expectedsequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However, there also is some writing software which permits setting ofthe playback order. 26 En Appendix Additional Information ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discsare converted to MP3/WMA/ WAV files and burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/ CD-ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each

one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD.

Important ! When naming an MP3/WMA/WAV file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav). ! This unit plays back files with thefilename extension (.mp3, .wma or .wav) as an MP3/ WMA/WAV file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than

MP3/WMA/WAV files. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7, 7.

1, 8 and 9. ! You can only play back WMA files in the frequencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with anincreased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) or from 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR), but in order to be able toenjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit doesnt support the following formats. Windows MediaAudio 9 Professional (5.1ch) Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless Windows Media Audio 9 Voice English MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible

with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.

1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver.2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.

x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz samplingfrequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. !The sound quality of MP3 files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in

order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

WAV additional information ! This unit plays back WAV files encoded in Linear PCM (LPCM) format or MS ADPCM format. ! You can only play back WAVfiles in the frequencies 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display maybe rounded. ! The sound quality of WAV files generally becomes better with a larger number of quantization bits. This unit can play recordings with 8 and 16

(LPCM) or 4 (MS ADPCM) quantization bits, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with the largernumber of quantization bits. En 27 Appendix Additional Information About folders and MP3/ WMA/WAV files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA/

WAV files on it is shown below.

Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. ! MP3/WMA/WAV files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is adelay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play

back up to 99 folders on one disc.

1 2 3 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to checkfolders that do not include MP3/WMA/WAV files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number.) 28 En Appendix Additional

Information Terms Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second).

The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the betterthe sound. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artists

name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tagediting functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

(8)

ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for thefollowing two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals

and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters.

) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark . and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies.Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse codemodulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. m3u Playlists created using the

WINAMP software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a workinggroup (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization).

MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential pulse codemodulation, which is the signal recording system used for the multimedia software of Microsoft Corporation. Multi-session Multi-session is a recordingmethod that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated

as a single unit or session.

Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in theoverall sound quality; the higher the bit-depth, the better the sound quality. However, increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore

storage space required. En 29 English Appendix Additional Information Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the timerequired for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs.

VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to theneeds of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality. WAV WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format

for Windows. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, orregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 30 En Appendix Additional Information Specifications General

Power source .....

......

... 14.4 V DC (10.8 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ...

....... Negative type Max.current consumption ..................

... 10.0 A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis .......... 178 50 157 mm Nose .............. 188 58 19 mm D Chassis ............ 178 50 162 mm Nose ............170 48 14 mm Weight ................. 1.3 kg Usable discs .........

(9)

...

... Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency ... 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits ...................

.. 16; linear Frequency characteristics ... 5 20,000 Hz (1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ......

94 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range ......

...

... 92 dB (1 kHz) Number of channels ......

.... 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ....

MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ... Ver.7, 7.1, 8, 9 (2ch audio) WAV signal format ....

...

... Linear PCM & MS ADPCM English Maximum power output .... 50 W 4 Continuous power output ... 27 W 4 (DIN 45324, +B=14.

4 V) Load impedance ......

...

.. 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance .....................

... 2.2 V/1 kW Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency .......

.. 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor ......

...

.. 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ................. 12dB Mid Frequency .........200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor ......

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ....

(10)

5k Hz Q Factor .........

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ......

......

.. 12dB Loudness contour Low ................ +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB (10 kHz) Mid ................ +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ...............

.... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: 30 dB) Audio Frequency range ....

...

. 87.5 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity .....

...

.... 8 dBf (0.7 V/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ...10 dBf (0.9 V/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ....

...

... 75 dB (IEC-A network) Distortion .......

.........

... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) Frequency response .........30 15,000 Hz (3 dB) Stereo separation ......45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz) Selectivity ...............

. 80 dB (200 kHz) FM tuner MW tuner Frequency range .......... 531 1,602 kHz (9 kHz) Usable sensitivity ........... 18 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ....

(11)

......... 153 281 kHz Usable sensitivity ............. 30 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ......

.. 65 dB (IEC-A network) Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. CD player System .....

............

... Compact disc audio system En 31 Contenido Gracias por haber comprado este producto Pioneer. Lea con detenimiento estas instrucciones sobre elfuncionamiento del aparato, para que pueda darle el mejor uso posible. Una vez que las haya ledo, guarde este manual en un lugar seguro para consultarlo

en el futuro. Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad 34 Caractersticas 34 Acerca de WMA 35 Proteccin del producto contra robo 35 Extraccin de lacartula 35 Colocacin de la cartula 35 Qu es cada cosa Unidad principal 36 Mando a distancia opcional 37 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y

seleccin de una fuente 38 Apagado de la unidad 38 Sintonizador Para escuchar la radio 39 Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias 39 Sintonizacin deseales fuertes 40 Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes 40 RDS Introduccin a la operacin RDS 41 Cambio de la visualizacin RDS 41Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY 41 Seleccin de frecuencias alternativas 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI automtica para emisoraspresintonizadas 42 Limitacin de las emisoras para programacin regional 42 Recepcin de anuncios de trfico 43 Lista PTY 43 Reproductor de CD incorporadoReproduccin de un CD 45 Repeticin de reproduccin 45 Reproduccin de las pistas en un orden aleatorio 45 Exploracin de las pistas de un CD 46 Pausa de lareproduccin de un CD 46 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 46 Bsqueda cada 10 pistas en el disco actual 46 Uso de la compresin y BMX 47 Uso de las funciones

CD TEXT 47 Reproductor de MP3/WMA/WAV Reproduccin de ficheros MP3/WMA/ WAV 48 Repeticin de reproduccin 49 Reproduccin de las pistas en unorden aleatorio 49 Exploracin de carpetas y pistas 50 Pausa de la reproduccin de un MP3/WMA/ WAV 50 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 50 Bsqueda cada10 pistas en la carpeta actual 50 Uso de la compresin y BMX 51 Visualizacin de informacin de texto de un disco MP3/WMA 51 Visualizacin de informacin detexto de un disco WAV 51 Ajustes de audio Introduccin a los ajustes de audio 52 Uso del ajuste del balance 52 Uso del ecualizador 52 Llamada de las curvasde ecualizacin 52 Ajuste de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 32 Es Contenido Ajuste preciso de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 Ajuste de la sonoridad 54 Mejora de

imagen frontal (F.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(12)

I.

E.) 54 Ajuste de los niveles de la fuente 54 Ajustes iniciales Configuracin de los ajustes iniciales 55 Ajuste del paso de sintona de FM 55 Cambio de labsqueda PI automtica 55 Ahorro del consumo de la batera 56 Informacin adicional Comprensin de los mensajes de error del reproductor de CD incorporado57 Silenciamiento del sonido 57 Reproductor de CD y cuidados 57 Discos CD-R/CD-RW 58 Ficheros MP3, WMA y WAV 58 Informacin adicional sobre MP3

59 Informacin adicional sobre WMA 60 Informacin adicional sobre WAV 60 Acerca de las carpetas y los ficheros MP3/ WMA/WAV 60 Glosario 62Especificaciones 64 Es 33 Espaol Seccin 01 Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad Las frecuencias del sintonizador de esta unidad estn asignadas para su

uso en Europa Occidental, Asia, Medio Oriente, frica y Oceana. El uso en otras reas puede causar una recepcin deficiente. Las funciones RDS (sistema dedatos de radio) slo se pueden utilizar en reas con emisoras FM que transmiten seales RDS. Caractersticas Reproduccin de CD Se pueden reproducir discoscompactos de msica, CD-R y CD-RW. Reproduccin de ficheros MP3 Se pueden reproducir ficheros MP3 grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabacionessegn la norma ISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). ! La venta de este producto slo otorga una licencia para su uso privado, no comercial. No otorga ninguna licencia ni

concede ningn derecho para utilizar este producto en transmisiones comerciales (es decir, lucrativas) en tiempo real (terrestres, satelitales, por cable y/o porcualquier otro medio), transmisiones/streaming por Internet, intranets y/u otras redes o en otros sistemas de distribucin de contenido electrnico, como por

ejemplo, aplicaciones de audio pago (pay-audio) o a solicitud (audio-on-demand). Se necesita una licencia independiente para su uso comercial. Paraobtener ms informacin, visite el sitio http://www.

mp3licensing.com. Reproduccin de ficheros WMA Se pueden reproducir ficheros WMA grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones segn la normaISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). Reproduccin de ficheros WAV Se pueden reproducir ficheros WAV grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones en formatos

LPCM (PCM lineal) o MS ADPCM). ! No permita que esta unidad entre en contacto con lquidos, ya que ello puede producir una descarga elctrica.Adems, el contacto con lquidos puede causar daos en la unidad, humo y recalentamiento. ! Hay pegada una etiqueta CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT en la parte

inferior de esta unidad. PRECAUCIN CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ! El CarStereo-Pass Pioneer es para usarse slo en Alemania. ! Conserve este manual amano para que pueda consultar los procedimientos de operacin y las precauciones cuando sea necesario. ! Mantenga siempre el volumen lo suficientemente

bajo como para que pueda escuchar los sonidos que provienen del exterior del vehculo.

! Proteja esta unidad de la humedad. ! Si se desconecta o se descarga la batera, la memoria preajustada se borrar y deber reprogramarla. ! En caso de queeste producto no funcione correctamente, comunquese con su concesionario o el Servicio Tcnico Oficial Pioneer ms prximo a su domicilio. 34 Es SeccinAntes de comenzar 01 Acerca de WMA Importante ! Nunca presione ni sujete el display y los botones con fuerza excesiva al extraer o colocar la cartula. !Evite someter la cartula a impactos excesivos. ! Mantenga la cartula fuera del alcance de la luz solar directa y no la exponga a altas temperaturas. Espaol Ellogo de Windows Media" impreso en la caja indica que esta unidad puede reproducir datos WMA. WMA es la abreviatura de Windows Media Audio y alude a

una tecnologa de compresin de audio desarrollada por Microsoft Corporation. Los datos WMA se pueden codificar utilizando Windows Media Player versin7 o posterior. Microsoft, Windows Media y el logo de Windows son marcas comerciales o registradas de Microsoft Corporation en los EE.UU. y/o en otros pases. Notas ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que esta unidad no funcionecorrectamente. ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que no se visualicen correctamente los nombres delbumes y dems informacin de texto. Extraccin de la cartula 1 Presione DETACH para soltar la cartula. Presione DETACH y el lado derecho del panel sesuelta de la unidad principal. 2 Tome la cartula y extrigala. Tome el lado derecho de la cartula y tire de l hacia la izquierda. La cartula saldr de la unidad

principal. 3 Coloque la cartula en la carcasa protectora provista para guardarla de manera segura.

Colocacin de la cartula Proteccin del producto contra robo El panel delantero se puede extraer de la unidad principal y almacenarse en su carcasaprotectora, provista como una medida antirrobo. 1 Coloque la cartula de modo plano contra la unidad principal. 2 Presione la cartula hacia la cara de launidad principal hasta que se asiente firmemente. Es 35 Seccin 02 Qu es cada cosa 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Unidad principal 1 Botn TA Presione para activar

o desactivar la funcin TA. Presione y mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin AF.

2 Ranura de carga de discos Introduzca el disco para reproducirlo. 3 Botn EJECT Presione este botn para expulsar un CD del reproductor de CDincorporado. 4 Botn AUDIO Presione este botn para seleccionar los diversos controles de calidad del sonido. 5 Botn DISPLAY Presione este botn paraseleccionar diferentes visualizaciones. 6 Botones a/b/c/d Presione estos botones para utilizar los controles de sintonizacin por bsqueda manual, avance rpido,

retroceso y bsqueda de pista.

Tambin se usan para controlar las funciones. 7 Botn LOUDNESS Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la sonoridad. 8 Botn DETACH Presione estebotn para extraer la cartula de la unidad principal. 9 Botn BAND Presione para seleccionar entre dos bandas FM y la banda MW/LW, y cancelar el modo de

control de funciones. a Botn LOCAL/BSM Presione para activar o desactivar la funcin local. Mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin BSM.b Botones 16 Presione para la sintonizacin preajustada. c Botn SOURCE Esta unidad se enciende al seleccionar una fuente. Presione este botn para

visualizar todas las fuentes disponibles. d VOLUME Haga girar el control para aumentar o disminuir el volumen.

e Botn EQ Presione este botn para seleccionar las diversas curvas de ecualizacin. 36 Es Seccin Qu es cada cosa 02 f 9 k j i g 4 h Espaol 6 Mando a distanciaopcional El mando a distancia de volante CD-R300 se vende por separado. Las funciones se utilizan de la misma manera que al usar los botones de la unidad

principal. Consulte la explicacin de la unidad principal acerca del uso de cada botn, con excepcin de ATT, que se explica a continuacin. f Botn VOLUMEPresione este botn para aumentar o disminuir el volumen. g Botn ATT Presione este botn para disminuir rpidamente el nivel de volumen alrededor del 90%.

Presinelo una vez ms para volver al nivel de volumen original.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(13)

h Botn TUNER Presione este botn para seleccionar el sintonizador como la fuente. i Botn PAUSE Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la pausa. jBotn CD Presione para seleccionar el lector de CD incorporado como la fuente.

k Botn FUNCTION No se utiliza. Es 37 Seccin 03 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y seleccin de una fuente Puede seleccionar la fuente quedesea escuchar. Para cambiar al reproductor de CD incorporado, coloque un disco en la unidad (consulte la pgina 45). % Al utilizar la unidad principal,

presione SOURCE para seleccionar una fuente. Presione SOURCE repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientes fuentes: Lector de CDincorporadoSintonizador Cuando se selecciona una fuente, la unidad se enciende.

% Al utilizar el mando a distancia, presione TUNER o CD para seleccionar una fuente. Presione cada botn repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientesfuentes: TUNER: SintonizadorFuentes desactivadas CD: Reproductor de CD incorporado Fuentes desactivadas Notas ! Si no hay un disco cargado en la

unidad, la fuente no cambiar al lector de CD incorporado. ! Si el cable azul/blanco de esta unidad est conectado al control del terminal de antena delvehculo, la antena se extiende cuando se enciende el equipo. Para retraer la antena, apague el equipo. Apagado de la unidad % Presione SOURCE y

mantenga presionado hasta que se apague la unidad.

38 Es Seccin Sintonizador 04 Para escuchar la radio 4 Para utilizar la sintonizacin manual, presione brevemente c o d. 5 Para utilizar la sintonizacin porbsqueda, presione c o d y mantenga presionado durante aproximadamente un segundo, y libere el botn. El sintonizador explorar las frecuencias hasta queencuentre una emisora con seales de suficiente intensidad como para asegurar una buena recepcin. 1 23 45 Se puede activar y desactivar la funcin AF(bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) de esta unidad. Se debe desactivar la funcin AF para la sintonizacin normal (consulte la pgina 42). 1 Indicador debanda Muestra la banda en que la radio est sintonizada: MW, LW o FM. 2 Indicador de frecuencia Muestra la frecuencia en que la radio est sintonizada. 3

Indicador LOC Aparece cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada. 4 Indicador de estreo (5) Muestra que la frecuencia seleccionada se esttransmitiendo en estreo. 5 Indicador del nmero de presintona Muestra la memoria seleccionada.

1 Presione SOURCE para seleccionar el sintonizador. 2 Utilice VOLUME para ajustar el nivel de sonido. 3 Presione BAND para seleccionar una banda.Presione BAND hasta que se visualice la banda deseada: F1, F2 para FM o MW/LW. Espaol 39 # Se puede cancelar la sintonizacin por bsqueda presionando

brevemente c o d. # Si presiona c o d y mantiene presionado, podr saltar las emisoras. La sintonizacin por bsqueda comienza inmediatamente despus de quelibera el botn. Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias Si se presiona cualquiera de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, se pueden almacenar con

facilidad hasta seis frecuencias de emisoras para llamarlas con posterioridad presionando un solo botn. % Cuando encuentre la frecuencia que deseaalmacenar en la memoria, presione uno de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16 y mantngalo presionado hasta que el nmero de presintona deje de

destellar. El nmero seleccionado destellar en el indicador del nmero de presintona y quedar iluminado.

Se ha almacenado en la memoria la frecuencia de la emisora de radio seleccionada. La prxima vez que presione el mismo botn de ajuste de presintonas, lamemoria recordar la frecuencia de la emisora. Es Seccin 04 Sintonizador Notas ! En la memoria se pueden almacenar hasta 12 emisoras FM, 6 para cadauna de las dos bandas FM, y 6 emisoras MW/LW. ! Tambin se pueden usar los botones a y b para llamar las frecuencias de las emisoras de radio asignadas a

los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. # Para cancelar el proceso de almacenamiento, presione LOCAL/BSM.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM y mantenga presionado hasta que se active la funcin BSM. BSM comienza a destellar. Mientras BSM est destellando, las seisfrecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes se almacenarn en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, ordenadas segn la intensidad de las seales. Una vezfinalizada la operacin, BSM deja de destellar. Sintonizacin de seales fuertes La sintonizacin por bsqueda local le permite sintonizar slo las emisoras de radio

con seales lo suficientemente fuertes como para asegurar una buena recepcin.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM repetidamente para activar o desactivar la sintonizacin por bsqueda local. Cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada,en el display aparece LOC. Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes La funcin BSM (memoria de las mejores emisoras) le permite almacenar

automticamente seis frecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. Una vez almacenadas, podr sintonizar esasfrecuencias presionando un solo botn. ! Al almacenar frecuencias con la funcin BSM, se pueden reemplazar las frecuencias que ha almacenado con los

botones 16. 40 Es Seccin RDS 05 Introduccin a la operacin RDS Cambio de la visualizacin RDS Cuando se sintoniza una emisora RDS, se visualiza elnombre del servicio de programa. Puede ver la frecuencia que est sintonizada, si as lo desea. % Presione DISPLAY. Presione DISPLAY repetidamente para

cambiar entre los siguientes ajustes: Nombre del servicio de programaInformacin PTYFrecuencia En la pgina 43 se indica la informacin PTY (cdigo deidentificacin de tipo de programa). 1 23 4 RDS (sistema de datos de radio) es un sistema que ofrece informacin junto con las transmisiones FM.Esta informacin no audible brinda funciones tales como nombre del servicio de programa, tipo de programa, espera por anuncio de trfico y sintonizacin

automtica, a fin de ayudar a los radioescuchas a encontrar y sintonizar la emisora deseada. 1 Nombre del servicio de programa Muestra el nombre delprograma que se est transmitiendo. 2 Indicador AF Aparece cuando la funcin AF (bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) est activada. 3 Indicador TA Aparece

cuando la funcin TA (espera por anuncio de trfico) est activada. 4 Indicador TP Aparece cuando una emisora TP est sintonizada. Notas ! Es posible que notodas las emisoras suministren el servicio RDS. ! Las funciones RDS como AF y TA slo se activan cuando la radio est sintonizada en una emisora RDS.Espaol 41 # La informacin PTY y la frecuencia de la emisora actual aparecen en el display durante ocho segundos. Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY

La alarma PTY es un cdigo PTY especial para anuncios de emergencias tales como un desastre natural. Cuando el sintonizador recibe el cdigo de alarma deradio, ALARM aparece en el display y el volumen se ajusta segn el volumen de TA.

Cuando la emisora deja de transmitir el anuncio de emergencia, el sistema vuelve a la fuente anterior. ! Se puede cancelar un anuncio de emergenciapresionando TA.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

Additional Information

Understanding built-in CD

player error messages

When you contact your dealer or your nearest

Pioneer Service Center, be sure to record the

error message.

Message

Cause

ERROR-11, 12,

Dirty disc

17, 30

ERROR-11, 12,

Scratched disc

17, 30

ERROR-10, 11,

Electrical or me-

12, 17, 30, A0

chanical

ERROR-22, 23

The CD format

cannot be played

back

ERROR-44

All tracks are

skip tracks

Sound muting

Sound from this unit is muted automatically in

the following cases:

! When a call is made or received using a

cellular telephone connected to this unit.

! When the voice guidance is output from a

Pioneer navigation unit connected to this

unit.

The sound is turned off, MUTE is displayed

and no audio adjustments, except volume con-

trol, are possible. Operation returns to normal

when the phone connection or the voice gui-

dance is ended.

Action

Clean disc.

Replace disc.

Turn the ignition

ON and OFF, or

switch to a differ-

ent source, then

back to the CD

player.

Replace disc.

Replace disc.

CD player and care

! Use only CDs that have either of the two

Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as

shown below.

! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert ir-

regular, non-round, shaped CDs they may

jam in the CD player or not play properly.

! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or

warping before playing. CDs that have

cracks, scratches or are warped may not

play properly. Do not use such discs.

! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)

surface when handling the disc.

! Store discs in their cases when not in use.

! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do

not expose the discs to high temperatures.

! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft

cloth outward from the center.

! If the heater is used in cold weather, moist-

ure may form on components inside the

CD player. Condensation may cause the CD

player to malfunction. If you think that con-

densation is a problem turn off the CD

player for an hour or so to allow it to dry

out and wipe any damp discs with a soft

cloth to remove the moisture.

! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

Appendix

25

En

Adjustinginitialsettings

1

Initialsettingsletsyouperforminitialsetupof

differentsettingsforthisunit.

1Functiondisplay

Showsthefunctionstatus.

1PressSOURCEandholduntiltheunit

turnsoff.

2PressSOURCEandholduntilFMap-

pearsinthedisplay.

3PressAUDIOtodisplaythefunction

names.

PressAUDIOrepeatedlytoswitchbetween

thefollowingsettings:

FM(FMtuningstep)A-PI(AutoPISeek)

SAVE(Powersave)

Usethefollowinginstructionstooperateeach

particularsetting.

#Tocancelinitialsettings,pressBAND.

#Youcanalsocancelinitialsettingsbyholding

downSOURCEuntiltheunitturnsoff.

SettingtheFMtuningstep

NormallytheFMtuningstepemployedby

seektuningis50kHz.WhenAForTAison,

thetuningstepautomaticallychangesto100

kHz.Itmaybepreferabletosetthetuningstep

to50kHzwhenAFison.

!Thetuningstepremainsat50kHzduring

manualtuning.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFM.

2PresscordtoselecttheFMtuning

step.

Pressctoselect50(50kHz).Pressdtose-

lect100(100kHz).

SwitchingAutoPISeek

Theunitcanautomaticallysearchforadiffer-

entstationwiththesameprogramming,even

duringpresetrecall.

1PressAUDIOtoselectA-PI.

2PressaorbtoturntheAutoPIseek

onoroff.

Savingthebattery

consumption

Itispossibletosavethebatteryconsumption

whenthisunitisturnedoff.Afteroneminute

ofturningoffthisunit,thisunitwillbe

switchedintopowersavemode.

!Youcannotinsertandejectadiscwhile

thisunitisinpowersavemode.

!YoucanonlyuseSOURCEwhilethisunitis

inpowersavemode.

Important

Whenyoudisconnectabatteryinordertoreplace

it,thismodeisturnedoff.Wheninstallingthis

unitinavehiclethatdoesnothaveanACC(ac-

cessory)positionontheignitionswitch,thevehi-

clebatterymaybedraineddependingona

connectionmethod.Aftercheckingtheconnec-

tionmethod,turnthismodeonifneeded.

1PressAUDIOtoselectSAVE.

2Pressaorbtoturnpowersaveonor

off.

InitialSettings

En

24

Section

09

background image

About this unit

The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo-

cated for use in Western Europe, Asia, the

Middle East, Africa and Oceania. Use in other

areas may result in poor reception. The RDS

(radio data system) function operates only in

areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS sig-

nals.

CAUTION

! Do not allow this unit to come into contact

with liquids. Electrical shock could result.

Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat

could result from contact with liquids.

! A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is affixed

to the bottom of this unit.

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

! The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in

Germany.

! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op-

erating procedures and precautions.

! Always keep the volume low enough so that

you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle.

! Protect this unit from moisture.

! If the battery is disconnected or discharged,

the preset memory will be erased and must be

reprogrammed.

! Should this product fail to operate properly,

contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pio-

neer Service Station.

Features

CD playback

Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.

MP3 file playback

You can play back MP3 files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2

standard recordings).

! Supply of this product only conveys a li-

cense for private, non-commercial use and

does not convey a license nor imply any

right to use this product in any commercial

(i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad-

casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or

any other media), broadcasting/streaming

via internet, intranets and/or other net-

works or in other electronic content distri-

bution systems, such as pay-audio or

audio-on-demand applications. An inde-

pendent license for such use is required.

For details, please visit

http://www.mp3licensing.com.

WMA file playback

You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2

standard recordings).

WAV file playback

You can play back WAV files recorded on CD-

ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (Linear PCM (LPCM)/MS

ADPCM recordings).

About WMA

The Windows Media" logo printed on the box

indicates that this unit can play back WMA

data.

Before You Start

En

4

Section

01


1 Operation Manual Multi-CD control High power CD player with FM/AM tuner DEH-P2650 English Español Português (B)

2 Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. I.E.) 24 Adjusting source levels 25 2 En

3 Contents English Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 26 Setting the clock 26 Setting the FM tuning step 26 Setting the AM tuning step 27 Switching the warning tone 27 Switching the auxiliary setting 27 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off 28 Using the AUX source 28 Selecting AUX as the source 28 Setting the AUX title 28 Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages 29 CD player and care 29 CD-R/CD-RW discs 30 Specifications 31 En 3

4 Section 01 Before You Start About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this units potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and observe precautions on this page and in other sections. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the battery with the plus (+) and minus () poles pointing in the proper direction. Precautions CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always keep the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car.! Protect this unit from moisture.! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed.! If this unit does not operate properly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. CAUTION! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium battery.! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer.! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the battery in fire.! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools.! Do not store the battery with metallic materials.! In the event of battery leakage, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new battery.! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions rules that apply in your country/area. Using the remote control Point the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. 4 En

5 Before You Start Section 01 Important! Do not store the remote control in high temperatures or direct sunlight.! The remote control may not function properly in direct sunlight.! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor, where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for safe keeping. English Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft.! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound.! You can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 27. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to this unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Important! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons tightly when removing or attaching.! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks.! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2 Grip the left side of the front panel and pull it gently outward. Take care not to grip it tightly or to drop it. En 5

6 Section 02 Whats What Head unit 1 CLOCK button Press to change to the clock display. 2 PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. 3 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 4 OPEN button Press to open the front panel. 5 FUNCTION button Press to select functions. 6 AUDIO button Press to select various sound quality controls. 7 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 8 BAND button Press to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions buttons Press for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi-cd player. a EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves. b VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends outward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, press it again. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press to cycle through all of the available sources. d DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. Remote control Operation is the same as when using the button on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which is explained below. 6 En

7 Whats What Section e h g 6 f 7 English 2 e CD button Press to select the built-in or multi-cd player as the source. f TUNER button Press to select the tuner as the source. g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume. En 7

8 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on % Press SOURCE to turn the unit on. When you select a source the unit is turned on. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-in CD player, load a disc in this unit (refer to page 12). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: Built-in CD playertelevisiontuner Multi-CD playerexternal unit 1External unit 2AUX Notes! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. When no disc is set in this unit. When no magazine is set in the multi-cd player. When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 27).! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. Two external units can be controlled by this unit. When two external units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit.! When this units blue/white lead is connected to the cars auto-antenna relay control terminal, the cars antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. % When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER: TelevisionTunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playermulti-cd player Sources off 8 En

9 Tuner Section 04 Listening to the radio These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 27). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Press SOURCE until tuner is selected as the source. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2, F3 for FM or AM. 4 To performmanual tuning, press c or d with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 5 To performseek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # You can cancel seek tuning by pressing either c or d with a quick press. # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Note When the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo the stereo (5) indicator will light. English En 9

10 Section 04 Tuner Introduction of advanced tuner operation Function display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: BSM (best stations memory)local (local seek tuning) # To return to the frequency display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a preset tuning button 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same preset tuning button 16 the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes! Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memory.! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LOCAL. Press FUNCTION until LOCAL appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to set the sensitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2LOCAL 3 LOCAL 4 AM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2 10 En

11 Tuner Section 04 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. 4 When you want to return to normal seek tuning, press b to turn local seek tuning off. LOCAL:OFF appears in the display. English Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSM. Press FUNCTION until BSM appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press b. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using 16. En 11

12 Section 05 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD 4 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 5 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your built-in CD player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. CD loading slot appears. # After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. 2 Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start. CD loading slot 6 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12- cm or 8-cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs.! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot.! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play, check that the label side of the disc is up. Press EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again.! If the built-in CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 29.! The built-in CD player is not equipped with CD TEXT function.! A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. EJECT button # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # To avoid a malfunction, make sure that no metal object comes into contact with the terminals when the front panel is open. 3 Close the front panel. 12 En

13 Built-in CD Player Section 05 Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)pause (pause) # To return to the playback display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. 3 Press b to turn repeat play off. RPT:OFF appears in the display. The track currently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order. 3 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. English Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn repeat play on. RPT:ON appears in the display. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. En 13

14 Section 05 Built-in CD Player 3 When you find the desired track press b to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from this unit, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. 14 En

15 Built-in CD Player Section 05! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one.! If you connect a multi-cd player, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. English Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. En 15

16 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD You can use this unit to control a multi-cd player, which is sold separately. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your multi-cd player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 3 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-cd player. Press SOURCE until multi-cd is selected as the source. 4 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 5 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! When the multi-cd player performs the preparatory operations, READY is displayed.! If the multi-cd player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-cd player owners manual.! If there are no discs in the multi-cd player magazine, NO DISC is displayed. 50-disc multi-cd player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-cd players. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Select a disc you want to listen to with the 16 buttons. For discs located at 1 to 6, press the corresponding number button. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, press and hold the corresponding numbers such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display. # You can also sequentially select a disc by pressing a/b. 16 En

17 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Introduction of advanced multi-cd player operation 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. Press c or d until the desired repeat range appears in the display.! MCD Repeat all discs in the multi-cd player! TRK Repeat just the current track! DSC Repeat the current disc English 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to current track. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)its-p (ITS play)pause (pause)comp (compression and DBE) # To return to the playback display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-cd player: MCD (multi-cd player repeat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (disc repeat). 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. Notes! If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to MCD.! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, MCD and DSC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. 4 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. En 17

18 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Note If you turn random play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DRDM appears in the display. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DSC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MCD, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press b to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or disc) will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. If you turn scan play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DSCAN appears in the display. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-cd player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. Creating a playlist with ITS programming You can use ITS to enter and playback up to 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-cd players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. Press a or b to select a CD. 18 En

19 Multi-CD Player Section 06 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-cd player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page Press FUNCTION to select ITS-P. Press FUNCTION until ITS-P appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn ITS play on. ITS-P:ON appears in the display. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are programmed for ITS play then EMPTY is displayed. 4 Press b to turn ITS play off. ITS-P:OFF appears in the display. Playback will continue in normal order from the currently playing track and CD. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNCTION. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track fromyour ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display. 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press b to erase a track fromyour ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, EMPTY is displayed and normal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. English En 19

20 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off. 1 Play a CD that you want to delete. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display. 3 Press b to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD fromyour ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLR is displayed. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. Then you can easily search for and select a desired disc for play. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi-cd player. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) # When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player, you cannot switch to TITLE IN. The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted.! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. 20 En

21 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions You can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player. Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below. Displaying titles on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title)art NAME (disc artist name)trk TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO D-TTL). Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL, ART NAME, TRK TTL and ART NAME. When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLAY and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display. Using compression and bass emphasis You can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using the COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi-cd player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. Press FUNCTION until COMP appears in the display. # If the multi-cd player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you attempt to select it. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite setting. Press a or b repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFDBE 1DBE 2 English En 21

22 Section 07 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows when custom equalizer curve is currently selected. 2 Equalizer curve Shows which equalizer preset is currently selected. 3 FIE indicator Shows when the front image enhancer is turned on. 4 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status. 5 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)eq (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)fie (front image enhancer)sla (source level adjustment) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA. # To return to the display of each source, press BAND. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FAD. Press AUDIO until FAD appears in the display. # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. FAD :F15 FAD :R15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press c or d, BAL : 0 is displayed. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL :L9 BAL :R9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. 22 En

23 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCAL CUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create.! A separate CUSTOM curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM.! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: EQ-L (low)eq-m (mid)eq-h (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. Fine adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each currently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H). English % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT Level (db) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W Frequency (Hz) Adjusting equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM. 1 Press AUDIO to select EQ. Press AUDIO until EQ appears in the display. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh En 23

24 Section 07 Audio Adjustments 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency. Press c or d until the desired frequency appears in the display. Low: (Hz) Mid: k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select the desired Q factor. Press a or b until the desired Q factor appears in the display. 2N1N1W2W Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. Press AUDIO until LOUD appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD :MID) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. Each press of c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low)mid (mid)hi (high) 4 Press b to turn loudness off. LOUD :OFF appears in the display. Note You can also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS. Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers, limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent a sudden increase in volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select FIE. Press AUDIO until FIE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E. off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. Each press of c or d selects frequency in the following order: (Hz) Notes! After turning the F.I.E. function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 22) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced.! Turn the F.I.E. function off when using a 2- speaker system. 24 En

25 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources.! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. English 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. Press AUDIO until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume. SLA : +4 SLA : -4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes! The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments.! The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. En 25

26 Section 08 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2 Press c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Pressing c or d will select one segment of the clock display: HourMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of different settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until the clock appears in the display. 3 Press FUNCTION to select one of the initial settings. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following settings: ClockFM (FM tuning step)am (AM tuning step)warn (warning tone)aux (auxiliary input) Use the following instructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down FUNCTION until the unit turns off. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press FUNCTION to select clock. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until clock appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to set the clock. Pressing a will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 khz, the preset step, and 50 khz. 1 Press FUNCTION to select FM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until FM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 100 khz and 50 khz. The selected FM tuning step will appear in the display. Note If seek tuning is performed in 50 khz steps, stations may be tuned in imprecisely. Tune in the stations with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. 26 En

27 Initial Settings Section 08 Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 khz, the preset step, and 10 khz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 khz (531 1,602 khz allowable) to 10 khz (530 1,640 khz allowable). 1 Press FUNCTION to select AM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the AM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the AM tuning step between 9 khz and 10 khz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AUX appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn AUX on or off. Pressing a or b will turn AUX on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., AUX :ON). English Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. You can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press FUNCTION to select WARN. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until WARN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn WARN on or off. Pressing a or b will turn WARN on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., WARN :ON). Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment connected to this unit. En 27

28 Section 09 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off You can turn the clock display on or off. % Press CLOCK to turn the clock display on or off. Each press of CLOCK turns the clock display on or off. # The clock display disappears temporarily when you perform other operations, but the clock display appears again after 25 seconds. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C... X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X... C B A order. Note Even when the sources are off, the clock display appears on the display. Pressing CLOCK turns the clock display on or off. Using the AUX source An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owners manual. 3 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 4 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until AUX appears in the display. # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switching the auxiliary setting on the previous page. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 28 En

29 Additional Information Appendix Understanding built-in CD player error messages When problems occur during CD play an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Message Cause Action ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc Clean disc. 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30 Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-10, 11, 12, 17, 30, A0 ERROR-22, 23 ERROR-44 HEAT Electrical or mechanical The CD format cannot be played back All tracks are skip tracks CD player overheated CD player and care Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then back to the CD player. Replace disc. Replace disc. Turn off the CD player until the CD player cools down.! Use only CDs that have the Compact Disc Digital Audio mark as show below.! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly.! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs.! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc.! Store discs in their cases when not in use.! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures.! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.! To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc.! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture.! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. English En 29

30 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized.! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit.! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.)! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the car.! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit.! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically.! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc.! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. 30 En

31 Additional Information Appendix Specifications General Rated power source V DC (allowable voltage range: V DC) Grounding system... Negative type Max. current consumption A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis mm Nose mm D Chassis mm Nose mm Weight kg Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output W 4 Load impedance... 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance V/1 kw Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency... 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB Mid Frequency /500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB High Frequency k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain... ±12dB Loudness contour Low db (100 Hz), +3 db (10 khz) Mid db (100 Hz), +6.5 db (10 khz) High db (100 Hz), +11 db (10 khz) (volume: 30 db) CD player System... Compact disc audio system Usable discs... Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency khz Number of quantization bits... 16; linear Frequency characteristics ,000 Hz (±1 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (1 khz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range db (1 khz) Number of channels... 2 (stereo) FM tuner Frequency range MHz Usable sensitivity... 8 dbf (0.7 µv/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 db) 50 db quieting sensitivity dbf (0.9 µv/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Distortion % (at 65 dbf, 1 khz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dbf, 1 khz, mono) Frequency response ,000 Hz (±3 db) Stereo separation db (at 65 dbf, 1 khz) AM tuner Frequency range ,602 khz (9 khz) 530 1,640 khz (10 khz) Usable sensitivity µv (S/N: 20 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Infrared remote control Wavelength nm ±50 nm Output... typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. English En 31

Mostrar más

Frontimageenhancer(F.I.E.)

TheF.I.E.(FrontImageEnhancer)functionisa

simplemethodofenhancingfrontimagingby

cuttingmid-andhigh-rangefrequencyoutput

fromtherearspeakers,limitingtheiroutputto

low-rangefrequencies.Youcanselectthefre-

quencyyouwanttocut.

Precaution

WhentheF.I.E.functionisdeactivated,therear

speakersoutputsoundofallfrequencies,notjust

basssounds.Reducethevolumebeforedisenga-

gingF.I.E.topreventasuddenincreaseinvo-

lume.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFIE.

2PressatoturnF.I.E.on.

#ToturnF.I.E.off,pressb.

3Presscordtoselectadesiredfre-

quency.

100160250(Hz)

Notes

!AfterturningtheF.I.E.functionon,usethebal-

anceadjustment(refertopage21)andadjust

frontandrearspeakervolumelevelsuntilthey

arebalanced.

!TurntheF.I.E.functionoffwhenusinga2-

speakersystem.

Adjustingsourcelevels

SLA(sourceleveladjustment)letsyouadjust

thevolumelevelofeachsourcetopreventra-

dicalchangesinvolumewhenswitchingbe-

tweensources.

!SettingsarebasedontheFMtunervolume

level,whichremainsunchanged.

!TheMW/LWtunervolumelevelcanalsobe

adjustedwithsourceleveladjustments.

1ComparetheFMtunervolumelevel

withthelevelofthesourceyouwishtoad-

just.

2PressAUDIOtoselectSLA.

3Pressaorbtoadjustthesourcevo-

lume.

SLA+4SLA4isdisplayedasthesourcevo-

lumeisincreasedordecreased.

AudioAdjustments

En

23

English

Section

08

Messages 40, Cd player and care 40 cd-r/cd-rw discs 40, Understanding built-in cd player error messages – Pioneer DEH-P4700MP User Manual

background image

Understanding built-in CD

player error messages

When you contact your dealer or your nearest

Pioneer Service Center, be sure to record the

error message.

Message

Cause

Action

ERROR-11, 12,

17, 30

Dirty disc

Clean disc.

ERROR-11, 12,

17, 30

Scratched disc

Replace disc.

ERROR-10, 11,

12, 15, 17, 30,

A0

Electrical or me-

chanical

Turn the ignition

ON and OFF, or

switch to a differ-

ent source, then

back to the CD

player.

ERROR-22, 23 The CD format

cannot be played

back

Replace disc.

ERROR-44

All tracks are

skip tracks

Replace disc.

HEAT

CD player over-

heated

Turn off the CD

player until the CD

player cools down.

CD player and care

! Use only CDs that have either of the two

Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as

shown below.

! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert ir-

regular, non-round, shaped CDs they may

jam in the CD player or not play properly.

! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or

warping before playing. CDs that have

cracks, scratches or are warped may not

play properly. Do not use such discs.

! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)

surface when handling the disc.

! Store discs in their cases when not in use.

! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do

not expose the discs to high temperatures.

! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft

cloth outward from the center.

! If the heater is used in cold weather, moist-

ure may form on components inside the

CD player. Condensation may cause the CD

player to malfunction. If you think that con-

densation is a problem turn off the CD

player for an hour or so to allow it to dry

out and wipe any damp discs with a soft

cloth to remove the moisture.

! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

CD-R/CD-RW discs

! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs which have

been finalized.

Additional Information

En

40

Appendix

Something is: Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11

Runtime error 2 at 00004
Asus smart doctor error cannot load eio.dll
Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11

Frontimageenhancer(F.I.E.)

TheF.I.E.(FrontImageEnhancer)functionisa

simplemethodofenhancingfrontimagingby

cuttingmid-andhigh-rangefrequencyoutput

fromtherearspeakers,limitingtheiroutputto

low-rangefrequencies.Youcanselectthefre-

quencyyouwanttocut.

Precaution

WhentheF.I.E.functionisdeactivated,therear

speakersoutputsoundofallfrequencies,notjust

basssounds.Reducethevolumebeforedisenga-

gingF.I.E.topreventasuddenincreaseinvo-

lume.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFIE.

2PressatoturnF.I.E.on.

#ToturnF.I.E.off,pressb.

3Presscordtoselectadesiredfre-

quency.

100160250(Hz)

Notes

!AfterturningtheF.I.E.functionon,usethebal-

anceadjustment(refertopage21)andadjust

frontandrearspeakervolumelevelsuntilthey

arebalanced.

!TurntheF.I.E.functionoffwhenusinga2-

speakersystem.

Adjustingsourcelevels

SLA(sourceleveladjustment)letsyouadjust

thevolumelevelofeachsourcetopreventra-

dicalchangesinvolumewhenswitchingbe-

tweensources.

!SettingsarebasedontheFMtunervolume

level,whichremainsunchanged.

!TheMW/LWtunervolumelevelcanalsobe

adjustedwithsourceleveladjustments.

1ComparetheFMtunervolumelevel

withthelevelofthesourceyouwishtoad-

just.

2PressAUDIOtoselectSLA.

3Pressaorbtoadjustthesourcevo-

lume.

SLA+4SLA4isdisplayedasthesourcevo-

lumeisincreasedordecreased.

AudioAdjustments

En

23

English

Section

08

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER DEH-4700MP user guide

(1)

You can read the recommendations in the user guide, the technical guide or the installation guide for PIONEER DEH-4700MP.

You'll find the answers to all your questions on the PIONEER DEH-4700MP in the user manual (information, specifications, safety

advice, size, accessories, etc.). Detailed instructions for use are in the User's Guide.

User manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

User guide PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Operating instructions PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instructions for use PIONEER DEH-4700MP

Instruction manual PIONEER DEH-4700MP

(2)

Manual abstract:

@@Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. @@! A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is affixed to the bottomof this unit. CAUTION MP3 file playback You can play back MP3 files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). !

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in anycommercial (i.e, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent

license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.

com. WMA file playback You can play back WMA files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). WAV fileplayback You can play back WAV files recorded on CDROM/CD-R/CD-RW (Linear PCM (LPCM)/MS ADPCM recordings). CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT !

The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in Germany. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! Protect this unit from moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or

discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! Should this product fail to operate properly, contact your dealer or nearestauthorized Pioneer Service Station. About WMA Features CD playback Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.

The Windows Media" logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. 4 En Section Before You Start 01 WMA is short for WindowsMedia Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows MediaPlayer version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly. ! With some applications used toencode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. Grab the right side of thefront panel and pull away to the left. The front panel will be detached from the head unit. English 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for

safe keeping.

Attaching the front panel 1 Place the front panel flat against the head unit. 2 Press the front panel into the face of the head unit until it is firmly seated.Protecting your unit from theft The front pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft. Important !

Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attaching. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep thefront panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press DETACH to release the front panel. Press DETACH and the rightside of the panel is released from the head unit. En 5 Section 02 Whats What 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Head unit 1 TA button Press to turn TA function on or off.

Press and hold to turn AF function on or off.

2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. 3 EJECT button Press to eject a CD from your built-in CD player. 4 AUDIO button Press to select various soundquality controls. 5 DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. 6 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search

controls.

Also used for controlling functions. 7 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 8 DETACH button Press to remove the front panel from the headunit. 9 BAND button Press to select among two FM and MW/LW bands and cancel the control mode of functions. a LOCAL/BSM button Press to turn local

function on or off.

Press and hold to turn BSM function on or off, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. b 16 buttons Press for preset tuning. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press tocycle through all the available sources, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. d VOLUME Rotate it to increase or decrease the volume. e EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves.Optional remote control The steering remote control CD-R300 is sold separately. 6 En Section Whats What 02 f English 9 k j i g 4 h 6 Operation is the same

as when using the buttons on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which isexplained below, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. f VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume.

g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h TUNER button Press to selectthe tuner as the source. i PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. j CD button Press to select the built-in CD player as the source. k FUNCTION buttonNot used. En 7 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on and selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-inCD player, load a disc in the unit (refer to page 14). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch

between the following sources: Built-in CD playerTuner When you select a source the unit is turned on.

% When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER:TunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playerSources off Notes ! When no disc has been set in the unit, the source will not switch to the built-in CD player. ! Whenthis units blue/white lead is connected to the vehicles auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicles antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To

retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off.

8 En Section Tuner 04 Listening to the radio 1 23 45 This units AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off. AF should be off fornormal tuning operation (refer to page 11). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, MW, LW or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which

frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on.

4 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 1 2Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing either c or d. # If you press and

hold c or d you can skip stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. 5 To perform seek tuning, press and pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 c or d for about one secondand release.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(3)

The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. English Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If youpress any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button.

% When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press one of preset tuning buttons 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. Thenumber you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Thenext time you press the same preset tuning button the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes ! Up to 12 FM stations, 6 for each of the two FM

bands, and 6 MW/LW stations can be stored in memory. ! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. 3Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2 for FM or MW/LW. 4 To perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d.En 9 Section 04 Tuner Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception.

% Press LOCAL/BSM repeatedly to turn local seek tuning on or off. When local seek tuning is on, LOC appears in the display. Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and

once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcastfrequencies you have saved using buttons 16. % Press LOCAL/BSM and hold until the BSM turns pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning buttons 16 in the order of their signalstrength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press LOCAL/BSM. 10 En Section RDS 05 Introduction of RDS operation 1 23

4 % Press DISPLAY.

Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Program service namePTY information Frequency PTY (program type ID code)information is listed on page 13. English RDS (radio data system) is a system for providing information along with FM broadcasts. This inaudible information

provides such features as program service name, program type, traffic announcement standby and automatic tuning, intended to aid radio listeners in findingand is tuning in to a desired station. 1 Program service name Shows the name of broadcast program. 2 AF indicator Shows when AF (alternative frequenciessearch) function is on. 3 TA indicator Shows when TA (traffic announcement standby) function is on. 4 TP indicator Shows when a TP station is t TA again. 3Use VOLUME to adjust the TA volume when a traffic announcement begins. The newly set volume is stored in memory and recalled for subsequent traffic

announcements. 4 Press TA while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announcement.

The tuner returns to the original source but remains in the standby mode until TA is pressed again. # You can also cancel the announcement by pressingSOURCE, BAND, a, b, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, c or d while a traffic announcement is being received. Notes ! The system switches back to the original source following trafficannouncement reception. ! Only TP and enhanced other networks TP stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when TA is on. Specific EASY MUSOTH MUS JAZZ COUNTRY NAT MUS OLDIES FOLK MUS L.CLASS CLASSIC EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED CHILDREN SOCIALRELIGION PHONE IN TOURING LEISURE DOCUMENT Type of program Easy listening music Non-categorized music Jazz Country music National music

Oldies music, golden oldies Folk music Light classical music Serious classical runtime errorthis application has requested the runtime Educational programs All radio plays and serials National or regionalculture Nature, science and technology Light entertainment Childrens Social affairs Religious affairs or services Phone In Travel programs, not forannouncements about traffic problems Hobbies and recreational activities Documentaries English PTY list Specific NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORTWEATHER FINANCE POP MUS ROCK MUS Type of program News Current affairs General information and advice Sports Weather reports/meteorologicalinformation Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc. Popular music Contemporary modern music En 13 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD ! Ifan error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 25. 1 2 Repeating play Repeat play lets

you hear the same track over again. % Press 5 repeatedly to turn repeat play on or off. When repeat play is on, RPT appears in the display.1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 1 Insert a CD into the

CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc.

# After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the built-in CD player. # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # If you perform track search orfast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets

you play pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 tracks on the CD in a random order.

% Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off. When random play is on, RDM appears in the display. 3 To perform fast forward or reverse, press andhold c or d. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the searchmethod on the next page.) 4 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the

start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12cm or 8-cm (single) CD at atime.

Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs. ! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 14En Section Built-in CD Player 06 2 When you find the desired track press 3 to turn scan play off. # After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page.

2 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks on a disc. English Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. % Press 6repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE.

(4)

# If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the disc. # If a disc contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls thefirst track of the disc. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of

the disc. Selecting the search method You can switch the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks.% Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGHSearching every 10 tracks Using compression and BMX Using the COMP (compression) and BMX functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of this

player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMXcontrols sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the

playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings:COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX 2 Searching every 10 tracks in the current disc If a disc contains over 10 tracks, you can search every

10 tracks. When a disc contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play.

En 15 Section 06 Built-in CD Player Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discsmay contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CDTEXT discs support the functions listed below. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeDISC TTL(disc title)ART NAME (disc artist name)TRK TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 a CD TEXTdisc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T-TTL). Note You can scroll to the left the title by pressing and holding DISPLAY. 16 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV

Player 07 Playing MP3/WMA/WAV # To return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playbackcommences with folder 02.

English 12 3 4 5 4 To perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 1 Folder number indicator Shows the number of folder currently playing. 2 MP3indicator Shows when the MP3 file is playing. 3 WMA indicator Shows when the WMA file is playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of

the current track (file).

5 Track number indicator Shows the track (file) currently playing. ! If a track number 100 to 199 is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator willlight. ! If a track number 200 or more is selected, d on the left of the track number indicator will blink. 1 Insert a CD-ROM into the CD loading slot. Playback

will automatically start.

# This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached. # If you selectROUGH, pressing and holding c or d enables you to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 19.) 5 To skipback or forward to another track, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressingagain will skip to the previous track. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE

CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/ WMA/WAV and CD-DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback ofMP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA), pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, playback starts at the first track on the disc.

! The built-in CD player can play back an MP3/ WMA/WAV file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 26 for files that can be played back.) ! Do not insertanything other than a CD into the CD loading slot. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up CD playback and the sound being issued. When beingread in, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, FRMTREAD is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains

no files, playback commences with folder 02.) # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc. # After a CD-ROM has been inserted, press SOURCE to select thebuilt-in CD player.

# You can eject a CD-ROM by pressing EJECT. 2 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press a or b to select a folder. # You cannot select a folder thatdoes not have an MP3/WMA/WAV file recorded in it. En 17 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate)

files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used.

! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NO AUDIO is displayed. ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digitalrights management (DRM)SKIPPED is displayed while the protected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT isdisplayed, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If an error message such as ERROR-11 is displayed, refer to Understanding built-in CD player

error messages on page 25.

Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FRPT (folder repeat) and disc repeat. 1Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press 4 repeatedly to turn random play on or off, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. When random play is on, RDM appears inthe display. # Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 you turn random play on during FRPT, FRDM appears in the display. Repeating play For MP3/WMA/WAV playback, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, there are three repeat

play ranges: FRPT (folder repeat), RPT (one-track repeat) and disc repeat. % Press 5 to select the repeat range. Press 5 until the desired repeat rangeappears in the display. ! RPT Repeat just the current track ! FRPT Repeat the current folder ! Play time (e.

g., 0123) Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. ! If you perform track searchor fast forward/reverse during RPT, the repeat play range changes to FRPT. ! When FRPT is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder.

Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FRPT (folder repeat), the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. Whenyou are using disc repeat, the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on

this page.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(5)

2 Press 3 to turn scan play on. SCAN appears in the display.

The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. # If you turn scan play on during FRPT, FSCN appears inthe display. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) press 3 to turn scan play off. # After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the

tracks will begin again. 18 En Section MP3/WMA/WAV Player 07 Pausing MP3/WMA/WAV playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of theMP3/WMA/WAV.

% Press 6 repeatedly to turn pause on or off. When pause is on, PAUSE appears in the display. # You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. trackof the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding d recalls the last track of the folder.# If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. Also, if the remaining number of tracks aftersearching every 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding c recalls the first track of the folder. English Using compression and BMX Selecting the search

method You can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching every 10 tracks. % Press 2 to select the search method. Press 2 untilthe desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV Fast forward and reverse ! ROUGH Searching every 10 tracks Using the COMP (compression)and BMX functions let you adjust the sound pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 quality of this player. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. The COMP function balancesthe output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. BMX controls sound reverberations to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as

you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to.

% Press 1 to select your favorite setting. Press 1 repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFBMX 1BMX2 Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 every 10 tracks in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search every 10 tracks. When one folder contains a lotof tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the search method on this page. 2Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks in the current folder. # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding d recalls the last

Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc Text information recorded on a MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAYrepeatedly to switch between the following settings: En 19 Section 07 MP3/WMA/WAV Player Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)TRK TTL(track title)ART NAME (artist name)ALBM TTL (album title) COMMENT (comment)Bit rate Note You can scroll to the left the text information by pressingand holding DISPLAY. # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not displayed even after switching to bit

rate.

(VBR will be displayed.) # When pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 back WMA files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the average bit rate value pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 displayed. # If specificinformation has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME).

# With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Note You can scroll to the leftthe text information by pressing and holding DISPLAY. Displaying text information on WAV disc You can display text information recorded on a WAV disc. %

Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timeFOLDER (folder name)FILE (file name)Sampling frequency #You can only play back WAV files in the frequencies 16, 22.

05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 20 En SectionAudio Adjustments 08 Introduction of audio adjustments 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. FAD F15 FAD R15 is displayed as the front/ rear

speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. English 1 2 3 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows whencustom equalizer curve is currently selected. 2 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status.

3 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly toswitch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)EQ (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)FIE (front image enhancer)SLA (source leveladjustment) 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. BAL L 9 BAL R 9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Usingthe equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are sixstored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCALCUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA.

# If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. # To return to the display ofeach source, press BAND. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats.

1 # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. Press AUDIO to select FAD. ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve thatyou create. ! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by

switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve.

En 21 Section 08 Audio Adjustments % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT ! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve

will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. 1 Press AUDIO and hold untilfrequency and the Q factor (e.g.

, F- 80 Q 1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency.Low: 4080100160 (Hz) Mid: 2005001k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 desired Q factor. 2N1N1W2W Adjusting equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(6)

! If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve withCUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 1 Press AUDIO to select EQ. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust.EQ-L (low)EQ-M (mid)EQ-H (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. +6 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Adjusting

loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. # You can then selectanother band and adjust the level. Fine-adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of eachcurrently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H), pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. LOUD indicator is displayed. # To turn loudness off, press b. # You can

also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS.

Level (dB) Q=2N Center frequency Frequency (Hz) Q=2W 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low)MID (mid)HI (high) 22 En Section AudioAdjustments 08 Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.

I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers,limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.

I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent asudden increase in volume. ! The MW/LW tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with

the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA.

English 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. SLA +4 SLA 4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. 1 2 Press AUDIO to selectFIE. Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E.

off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. 100160250 (Hz) Notes ! After turning the F.I.E.

function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 21) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced. ! Turn the F.I.E. functionoff when using a 2speaker system.

Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switchingbetween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. En 23 Section 09 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2Press c or d to select the FM tuning step, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press c to select 50 (50 kHz). Press d to select 100 (100 kHz). 1 Initial settings lets you perform initial setup ofdifferent settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press SOURCE and hold

until FM appears in the display. 3 Press AUDIO to display the function names.

Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FM (FM tuning step)A-PI (Auto PI Seek) SAVE (Power save) Use the followinginstructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down SOURCE until

the unit turns off. Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a different station with the same programming, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, even during preset recall. 1Press AUDIO to select A-PI. 2 Press a or b to turn the Auto PI seek on or off. Saving the battery consumption It is possible to save the battery consumptionwhen this unit is turned off. After one minute of turning off this unit, this unit will be switched into power save mode. ! You cannot insert and eject a disc while

this unit is in power save mode. ! You can only use SOURCE while this unit is in power save mode.

Important Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or TA is on, the tuning step automaticallychanges to 100 kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. ! The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning. 1 Press

AUDIO to select FM.

When you disconnect a battery in order to replace it, this mode is turned off. When installing this unit in a vehicle that does not have an ACC (accessory)position on the ignition switch, the vehicle battery may be drained depending on a connection method. After checking the connection method, turn this mode

on if needed. 1 Press AUDIO to select SAVE. 2 Press a or b to turn power save on or off.

24 En Appendix Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer ServiceCenter, be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action Clean disc. Replace disc. Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source,

then back to the CD player, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. CD player and care English ! Use only CDs that have either of the two Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as shown below.ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, Scratched disc 17, 30 ERROR-10, 11, Electrical or me12, 17, 30, A0 chanical ! Use only normal, roundCDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly. ERROR-22, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, 23 The CD format Replace disc. cannotbe played back All tracks are skip tracks Replace disc. ERROR-44 Sound muting Sound from this unit is muted automatically in the following cases: ! When a

call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit.

! When the voice guidance is output from a Pioneer navigation unit connected to this unit. The sound is turned off, MUTE is displayed and no audioadjustments, except volume control, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, are possible. Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice guidance is ended. ! Check all CDs for

cracks, scratches or warping before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touchingthe recorded (non-printed) surface when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose

the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 cloth outward from the center. ! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside theCD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to malfunction. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to

allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

En 25 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have beenfinalized, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(7)

, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environment.Please record with the correct format.

(For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight,high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this

unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skipinformation are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 playback will be longer than when

you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! MP3, WMA and WAV files !MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to anaudio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later.

WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format for Windows. With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operatecorrectly. With some applications used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. This unit allowsplayback of MP3/WMA/ WAV files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Disc recordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with theRomeo and Joliet file system can be played back. It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. MP3/WMA/WAV files are not compatible

with packet write data transfer, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. The maximum pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3. wma or .wav), is 64, from the first character. The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. In case of files recordedaccording to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 characters can be displayed. When playing discs with MP3/WMA/WAV files and audio data (CD-DA)

such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA/WAV and CD-DA.The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the expectedsequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However, there also is some writing software which permits setting ofthe playback order. 26 En Appendix Additional Information ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discsare converted to MP3/WMA/ WAV files and burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/ CD-ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each

one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD.

Important ! When naming an MP3/WMA/WAV file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3. wma or .wav). ! This unit plays back files with thefilename extension (.mp3. wma or .wav) as an MP3/ WMA/WAV file. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than

MP3/WMA/WAV files. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7, 7.

1, 8 and 9. ! You can only play back WMA files in the frequencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with anincreased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) or from 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR), but in order to be able toenjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit doesnt support the following formats. Windows MediaAudio 9 Professional (5.1ch) Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless Windows Media Audio 9 Voice English MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible

with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.

1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver.2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.

x exist. ! The emphasis pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequencies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, 44.1, 48 kHz samplingfrequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility. ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. !The sound quality of MP3 files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in

order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

WAV additional information ! This unit plays back WAV files encoded in Linear PCM (LPCM) format or MS ADPCM format, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. ! You can only play back WAVfiles in the frequencies 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz (LPCM), or 22.05 and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM). The sampling frequency shown in the display maybe rounded. ! The sound quality of WAV files generally becomes better with a larger number of quantization bits. This unit can play recordings with 8 and 16

(LPCM) or 4 (MS ADPCM) quantization bits, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with the largernumber of quantization bits. En 27 Appendix Additional Information About folders and MP3/ WMA/WAV files ! An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3/WMA/

WAV files on it is shown below.

Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected. ! MP3/WMA/WAV files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However, there is adelay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play

back up to 99 folders on one disc.

1 2 3 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user can not assign folder numbers. ! It is not v-ray error src/globillummap.cpp to checkfolders that do not include MP3/WMA/WAV files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number.) 28 En Appendix Additional

Information Terms Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, or bps units (bits per second).

The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 rate, the betterthe sound. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the artists

name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tagediting functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the number of characters, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

(8)

ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for thefollowing two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals

and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters.

) Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 (including the separation mark. and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies.Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse codemodulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. m3u Playlists created using the

WINAMP software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a workinggroup (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization).

MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential pulse codemodulation, which is the signal recording system used for the multimedia software of Microsoft Corporation. Multi-session Multi-session is a recordingmethod that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated

as a single unit or session.

Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in theoverall sound quality; the higher the bit-depth, the better the sound quality. However, increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore

storage space required. En 29 English Appendix Additional Information Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the timerequired for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs.

VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 bit rate according to theneeds of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality. WAV WAV is short for waveform. It is a standard audio file format

for Windows, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media" Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, orregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 30 En Appendix Additional Information Specifications General

Power source ..

..

. 14.4 V DC (10.8 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system .

.. Negative type Max.current consumption ......

. 10.0 A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis .... 178 50 157 mm Nose ..... 188 58 pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 mm D Chassis .... 178 50 162 mm Nose ....170 48 14 mm Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 ......, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 1.3 kg Usable discs ...

(9)

.

. Compact disc Signal format: Sampling frequency ., pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 44.1 kHz Number of quantization bits .......

. 16; linear Frequency characteristics . 5 20,000 Hz (1 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ..

94 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range ..

.

. 92 dB (1 kHz) Number of channels ..

. 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ..

MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format . Ver.7, 7.1, 8, 9 (2ch audio) WAV signal format .

.

. Linear PCM & MS ADPCM English Maximum power output .. 50 W 4 Continuous power output . 27 W 4 (DIN 45324, +B=14.

4 V) Load impedance ..

.

. 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance .......

. 2.2 V/1 kW Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency ..

. 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor ..

.

. 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ....., pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 12dB Mid Frequency ...200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor ..

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ..

(10)

5k Hz Q Factor ...

0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ..

..

. 12dB Loudness contour Low ...... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB (10 kHz) Mid ...... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB (10 kHz) High .....

. +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: 30 dB) Audio Frequency range ..

.

. 87.5 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..

.

. 8 dBf (0.7 V/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity .10 dBf (0.9 V/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio .

.

. 75 dB (IEC-A network) Distortion ..

...

. 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, mono) Frequency response ...30 15,000 Hz (3 dB) Stereo separation ..45 dB (at 65 dBf, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, 1 kHz) Selectivity .....

. 80 dB (200 kHz) FM tuner MW tuner Frequency range ... 531 1,602 kHz (9 kHz) Usable sensitivity .... 18 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ..

(11)

... 153 281 kHz Usable sensitivity .... 30 V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ..

. 65 dB (IEC-A network) Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. CD player System ..

....

. Compact disc audio system En 31 Contenido Gracias por haber comprado este producto Pioneer. Lea con detenimiento estas instrucciones sobre elfuncionamiento del aparato, para que pueda darle el mejor uso posible. Una pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 que las haya ledo, guarde este manual en un lugar seguro para consultarlo

en el futuro. Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad 34 Caractersticas 34 Acerca de WMA 35 Proteccin del producto contra robo 35 Extraccin de lacartula 35 Colocacin de la cartula 35 Qu es cada cosa Unidad principal 36 Mando a distancia opcional 37 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y

seleccin de una fuente 38 Apagado de la unidad 38 Sintonizador Para escuchar la radio 39 Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias 39 Sintonizacin deseales fuertes 40 Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes 40 RDS Introduccin a la operacin RDS 41 Cambio de la visualizacin RDS 41Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY 41 Seleccin de frecuencias alternativas 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI 42 Uso de la bsqueda PI automtica para emisoraspresintonizadas 42 Limitacin de las emisoras para programacin regional 42 Recepcin de anuncios de trfico 43 Lista PTY 43 Reproductor de CD incorporadoReproduccin de un CD 45 Repeticin de reproduccin 45 Reproduccin de las pistas en un orden aleatorio 45 Exploracin de las pistas de un CD 46 Pausa de lareproduccin de un CD 46 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 46 Bsqueda cada 10 pistas en el disco actual 46 Uso de la compresin y BMX 47 Uso de las funciones

CD TEXT 47 Reproductor de MP3/WMA/WAV Reproduccin de ficheros MP3/WMA/ WAV 48 Repeticin de reproduccin 49 Reproduccin de las pistas en unorden aleatorio 49 Exploracin de carpetas y pistas 50 Pausa de la reproduccin de un MP3/WMA/ WAV 50 Seleccin del mtodo de bsqueda 50 Bsqueda cada10 pistas en la carpeta actual 50 Uso de la compresin y BMX 51 Visualizacin de informacin de texto de un disco MP3/WMA 51 Visualizacin de informacin detexto de un disco WAV 51 Ajustes de audio Introduccin a los ajustes de audio 52 Uso del ajuste del balance 52 Uso del ecualizador 52 Llamada de las curvasde ecualizacin 52 Ajuste de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 32 Es Contenido Ajuste preciso de las curvas de ecualizacin 53 Ajuste de la sonoridad 54 Mejora de

imagen frontal (F.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(12)

I.

E.) 54 Ajuste de los niveles de la fuente 54 Ajustes iniciales Configuracin de los ajustes iniciales 55 Ajuste del paso de pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 de FM 55 Cambio de labsqueda PI automtica 55 Ahorro del consumo de la batera 56 Informacin adicional Comprensin de los mensajes de error del reproductor de CD incorporado57 Silenciamiento del sonido 57 Reproductor de CD y cuidados 57 Discos CD-R/CD-RW 58 Ficheros MP3, WMA y WAV 58 Informacin adicional sobre MP3

59 Informacin adicional sobre WMA 60 Informacin adicional sobre WAV 60 Acerca de las carpetas y los ficheros MP3/ WMA/WAV 60 Glosario 62Especificaciones 64 Es 33 Espaol Seccin 01 Antes de comenzar Acerca de esta unidad Las frecuencias del sintonizador de esta unidad estn asignadas para su

uso en Europa Occidental, Asia, Medio Oriente, frica y Oceana. El uso en otras reas puede causar una recepcin deficiente. Las funciones RDS (sistema dedatos de radio) slo se pueden utilizar en reas con emisoras FM que transmiten seales RDS. Caractersticas Reproduccin de CD Se pueden reproducir discoscompactos de msica, CD-R y CD-RW. Reproduccin de ficheros MP3 Se pueden reproducir ficheros MP3 grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabacionessegn la norma ISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). ! La venta de este producto slo otorga una licencia para su uso privado, no comercial. No otorga ninguna licencia ni

concede ningn derecho para utilizar este producto en transmisiones comerciales (es decir, lucrativas) en tiempo real (terrestres, satelitales, por cable y/o porcualquier otro medio), transmisiones/streaming por Internet, intranets y/u otras redes o en otros sistemas de distribucin de contenido electrnico, como por

ejemplo, aplicaciones de audio pago (pay-audio) o a solicitud (audio-on-demand). Se necesita una licencia independiente para su uso comercial. Paraobtener ms informacin, visite el sitio http://www.

mp3licensing.com. Reproduccin de ficheros WMA Se pueden reproducir ficheros WMA grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones segn la normaISO9660 Nivel 1/Nivel 2). Reproduccin de ficheros WAV Se pueden reproducir ficheros WAV grabados en CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW (grabaciones en formatos

LPCM (PCM lineal) o MS ADPCM). ! No permita que esta unidad entre en contacto con lquidos, ya que ello puede producir una descarga elctrica.Adems, el contacto con lquidos puede causar daos en la unidad, humo y recalentamiento. ! Hay pegada una etiqueta CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT en la parte

inferior de esta unidad, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. PRECAUCIN CLASS pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 LASER PRODUCT ! El CarStereo-Pass Pioneer es para usarse slo en Alemania. ! Conserve este manual amano para que pueda consultar los procedimientos de operacin y las precauciones cuando sea necesario. ! Mantenga siempre el volumen lo suficientemente

bajo como para que pueda escuchar los sonidos que provienen del exterior del vehculo.

! Proteja esta unidad de la humedad. ! Si se desconecta o se descarga la batera, la memoria preajustada se borrar y deber reprogramarla. ! En caso de queeste producto no funcione correctamente, comunquese con su concesionario o el Servicio Tcnico Oficial Pioneer ms prximo a su domicilio. 34 Es SeccinAntes de comenzar 01 Acerca de WMA Importante ! Nunca presione ni sujete el display y los botones con fuerza excesiva al extraer o colocar la cartula. !Evite someter la cartula a impactos excesivos. ! Mantenga la cartula fuera del alcance de la luz solar directa y no la exponga a altas temperaturas. Espaol Ellogo de Windows Media" impreso en la caja indica que esta unidad puede reproducir datos WMA. WMA es la abreviatura de Windows Media Audio y alude a

una tecnologa de compresin de audio desarrollada por Microsoft Corporation. Los datos WMA se pueden codificar utilizando Windows Media Player versin7 o posterior. Microsoft, Windows Media y el logo de Windows son marcas comerciales o registradas de Microsoft Corporation en los EE.UU. y/o en otros pases. Notas ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que esta unidad no funcionecorrectamente. ! Cuando se utilizan ciertas aplicaciones para codificar los ficheros WMA, es posible que no se visualicen correctamente los nombres delbumes y dems informacin de texto. Extraccin de la cartula 1 Presione DETACH para soltar la cartula. Presione DETACH y el lado derecho del panel sesuelta de la unidad principal. 2 Tome la cartula y extrigala. Tome el lado derecho de la cartula y tire de l hacia la izquierda. La cartula saldr de la unidad

principal. 3 Coloque la cartula en la carcasa protectora provista para guardarla de manera segura.

Colocacin de la cartula Proteccin del producto contra robo El panel delantero se puede extraer de la unidad principal y almacenarse en su carcasaprotectora, provista como una medida antirrobo. 1 Coloque la cartula de modo plano contra la unidad principal. 2 Presione la cartula hacia la cara de launidad principal hasta que se asiente firmemente. Es 35 Seccin 02 Qu es cada cosa 1 2 345 6 ed c b a9 8 7 Unidad principal 1 Botn TA Presione para activar

o desactivar la funcin TA. Presione y mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin AF.

2 Ranura de carga de discos Introduzca el disco para reproducirlo. 3 Botn EJECT Presione este botn para expulsar un CD del reproductor de CDincorporado. 4 Botn AUDIO Presione este botn para seleccionar los diversos controles de calidad del sonido. 5 Botn DISPLAY Presione este botn pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 diferentes visualizaciones. 6 Botones a/b/c/d Presione estos botones para utilizar los controles de sintonizacin por bsqueda manual, avance rpido,

retroceso y bsqueda de pista.

Tambin se usan para controlar las funciones. 7 Botn LOUDNESS Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la sonoridad. 8 Botn DETACH Presione estebotn para extraer la cartula de la unidad principal. 9 Botn BAND Presione para seleccionar entre dos bandas FM y la banda MW/LW, y cancelar el modo de

control de funciones. a Botn LOCAL/BSM Presione para activar o desactivar la funcin local. Mantenga presionado para activar o desactivar la funcin BSM.b Botones 16 Presione para la sintonizacin preajustada. c Botn SOURCE Esta unidad se enciende al seleccionar una fuente. Presione este botn para

visualizar todas las fuentes disponibles. d VOLUME Haga girar el control para aumentar o disminuir el volumen.

e Botn EQ Presione este botn para seleccionar las diversas curvas de ecualizacin. 36 Es Seccin Qu es cada cosa 02 f 9 k j i g 4 h Espaol 6 Mando a distanciaopcional El mando a distancia de volante CD-R300 se vende por separado. Las funciones se utilizan de la misma manera que al usar los botones de la unidad

principal. Consulte la explicacin de la unidad principal acerca del uso de cada botn, con excepcin de ATT, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, que se explica a continuacin. f Botn VOLUMEPresione este botn para aumentar o disminuir el volumen. g Botn ATT Presione este botn para disminuir rpidamente el nivel de volumen alrededor del 90%.

Presinelo una vez ms para volver al nivel de volumen original.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

(13)

h Botn TUNER Presione este botn para seleccionar el sintonizador como la fuente. i Botn PAUSE Presione este botn para activar o desactivar la pausa. jBotn CD Presione para seleccionar el lector de CD incorporado como la fuente.

k Botn FUNCTION No se utiliza. Es 37 Seccin 03 Encendido y apagado Encendido de la unidad y seleccin de una fuente Puede seleccionar la fuente quedesea escuchar. Para cambiar al reproductor de CD incorporado, coloque un disco en la unidad (consulte la pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 45), pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. % Al utilizar la unidad principal,

presione SOURCE para seleccionar una fuente. Presione SOURCE repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientes fuentes: Lector de CDincorporadoSintonizador Cuando se selecciona una fuente, la unidad se enciende.

% Al utilizar el mando a distancia, presione TUNER o CD para seleccionar una fuente. Presione cada botn repetidamente para cambiar entre las siguientesfuentes: TUNER: SintonizadorFuentes desactivadas CD: Reproductor de CD incorporado Fuentes desactivadas Notas ! Si no hay un disco cargado en la

unidad, la fuente no cambiar al lector de CD incorporado. ! Si el cable azul/blanco de esta unidad est conectado al control del terminal de antena delvehculo, la antena se extiende cuando se enciende el equipo. Para retraer la antena, apague el equipo. Apagado de la unidad % Presione SOURCE y

mantenga presionado hasta que se apague la unidad.

38 Es Seccin Sintonizador 04 Para escuchar la radio 4 Para utilizar la sintonizacin manual, presione brevemente c o d. 5 Para utilizar la sintonizacin porbsqueda, presione c o d y mantenga presionado durante aproximadamente un segundo, y libere el botn. El sintonizador explorar las frecuencias hasta queencuentre una emisora con seales de suficiente intensidad como para asegurar una buena recepcin. 1 23 45 Se puede activar y desactivar la funcin AF(bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) de esta unidad. Se debe desactivar la funcin AF para la sintonizacin normal (consulte la pgina 42). 1 Indicador debanda Muestra la banda en que la radio est sintonizada: MW, LW o FM. 2 Indicador de frecuencia Muestra la frecuencia en que la radio est sintonizada. 3

Indicador LOC Aparece cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada. 4 Indicador de estreo (5) Muestra que la frecuencia seleccionada se esttransmitiendo en estreo. 5 Indicador del nmero de presintona Muestra la memoria seleccionada.

1 Presione SOURCE para seleccionar el sintonizador. 2 Utilice VOLUME para ajustar el nivel de sonido. 3 Presione BAND para seleccionar una banda.Presione BAND hasta que se visualice la banda deseada: F1, F2 para FM o MW/LW. Espaol 39 # Se puede cancelar la sintonizacin por bsqueda presionando

brevemente c o d. # Si presiona c o d y mantiene presionado, podr saltar las emisoras. La sintonizacin por bsqueda comienza inmediatamente despus de quelibera el botn. Almacenamiento y llamada de frecuencias Si se presiona cualquiera de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, se pueden almacenar con

facilidad hasta seis frecuencias de emisoras para llamarlas con posterioridad presionando un solo botn. % Cuando encuentre la frecuencia que deseaalmacenar en la memoria, presione uno de los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16 y mantngalo presionado hasta que el nmero de presintona deje de

destellar. El nmero seleccionado destellar en el indicador del nmero de presintona y quedar iluminado.

Se ha almacenado en la memoria la frecuencia de la emisora de radio seleccionada. La prxima vez que presione el mismo botn de ajuste de presintonas, lamemoria recordar la frecuencia de la emisora. Es Seccin 04 Sintonizador Notas ! En la memoria se pueden almacenar hasta 12 emisoras FM, 6 para cadauna de las dos bandas FM, y 6 emisoras MW/LW. ! Tambin se pueden usar los botones a y b para llamar las frecuencias de las emisoras de radio asignadas a

los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. # Para cancelar el proceso de almacenamiento, presione LOCAL/BSM.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM y mantenga presionado hasta que se active la funcin BSM. BSM comienza a destellar. Mientras BSM est destellando, las seisfrecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes se almacenarn en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16, ordenadas segn la intensidad de las seales. Una vezfinalizada la operacin, BSM deja de destellar. Sintonizacin de seales fuertes La sintonizacin por bsqueda local le permite sintonizar slo las emisoras de radio

con seales lo suficientemente fuertes como para asegurar una buena recepcin.

% Presione LOCAL/BSM repetidamente para activar o desactivar la sintonizacin por bsqueda local. Cuando la sintonizacin por bsqueda local est activada,en el display aparece LOC. Almacenamiento de las frecuencias de radio ms fuertes La funcin BSM (memoria de las mejores emisoras) le permite almacenar

automticamente seis frecuencias de las emisoras ms fuertes en los botones de ajuste de presintonas 16. Una vez almacenadas, podr sintonizar esasfrecuencias presionando un solo botn. ! Al almacenar frecuencias con la funcin BSM, se pueden reemplazar las frecuencias que ha almacenado con los

botones 16. 40 Es Seccin RDS 05 Introduccin a la operacin RDS Cambio de la visualizacin RDS Cuando se sintoniza una emisora RDS, se visualiza elnombre del servicio de programa. Puede ver la frecuencia que est sintonizada, si as lo desea. % Presione DISPLAY. Presione DISPLAY repetidamente para

cambiar entre los siguientes ajustes: Nombre del servicio de programaInformacin PTYFrecuencia En la pgina 43 se indica la informacin PTY (cdigo deidentificacin de tipo de programa). 1 23 4 RDS (sistema de datos de radio) es un sistema que ofrece informacin junto con las transmisiones FM.Esta informacin no audible brinda funciones tales como nombre del servicio de programa, tipo de programa, espera por anuncio de trfico y sintonizacin

automtica, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 fin de ayudar a los radioescuchas a encontrar y sintonizar la emisora deseada. 1 Nombre del servicio de programa Muestra el nombre delprograma que se est transmitiendo. 2 Indicador AF Aparece cuando la funcin AF (bsqueda de frecuencias alternativas) est activada. 3 Indicador TA Aparece

cuando la funcin TA (espera por anuncio de trfico) est activada. 4 Indicador TP Aparece cuando una emisora TP est sintonizada. Notas ! Es posible que notodas las emisoras suministren el servicio RDS. ! Las funciones RDS como AF y TA slo se activan cuando la radio est sintonizada en una emisora RDS.Espaol 41 # La informacin PTY y la frecuencia de la emisora actual aparecen en el display durante ocho segundos. Recepcin de transmisiones de alarma PTY

La alarma PTY es un cdigo PTY especial para anuncios de emergencias tales como un desastre natural. Cuando el sintonizador recibe el cdigo de alarma deradio, ALARM aparece en el display y el volumen se ajusta segn el volumen de TA.

Cuando la emisora deja de transmitir el anuncio de emergencia, el sistema vuelve a la fuente anterior. ! Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 puede cancelar un anuncio de emergenciapresionando TA.

You're reading an excerpt. Click here to read official PIONEER

DEH-4700MP user guide

Messages 40, Cd player and care 40 cd-r/cd-rw discs 40, Understanding built-in cd player error messages – Pioneer DEH-P4700MP User Manual

background image

Understanding built-in CD

player error messages

When you contact your dealer or your nearest

Pioneer Service Center, be sure to record the

error message.

Message

Cause

Action

ERROR-11, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, 12,

17, 30

Dirty disc

Clean disc.

ERROR-11, 12,

17, 30

Scratched disc

Replace disc.

ERROR-10, 11,

12, 15, 17, 30,

A0

Electrical or me-

chanical

Turn the ignition

ON and OFF, or

switch to a differ-

ent source, then

back to the CD

player.

ERROR-22, 23 The CD format

cannot be played

back

Replace disc.

ERROR-44

All tracks are

skip tracks

Replace disc.

HEAT

CD player over-

heated

Turn off the CD

player until the CD

player cools down.

CD player and care

! Use only CDs that have either of the two

Compact Disc Digital Audio marks as

shown below.

! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert ir-

regular, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, non-round, shaped CDs they may

jam in the CD player or not play properly.

! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or

warping before playing. CDs that have

cracks, scratches or are warped may not

play properly. Do not use such discs.

! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)

surface when handling the disc.

! Store discs in their cases when not in use.

! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do

not expose the discs to high temperatures.

! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

! To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft

cloth outward from the center.

! If the heater is used in cold weather, moist-

ure may form on components inside the

CD player. Condensation may cause the CD

player to malfunction. If you think that con-

densation is a problem turn off the CD

player for an hour or so to allow it to dry

out and wipe any damp discs with a soft

cloth to remove the moisture.

! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback.

CD-R/CD-RW discs

! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs which have

been finalized.

Additional Information

En

40

Appendix

Adjustinginitialsettings

1

Initialsettingsletsyouperforminitialsetupof

differentsettingsforthisunit.

1Functiondisplay

Showsthefunctionstatus.

1PressSOURCEandholduntiltheunit

turnsoff.

2PressSOURCEandholduntilFMap-

pearsinthedisplay.

3PressAUDIOtodisplaythefunction

names.

PressAUDIOrepeatedlytoswitchbetween

thefollowingsettings:

FM(FMtuningstep)A-PI(AutoPISeek)

SAVE(Powersave)

Usethefollowinginstructionstooperateeach

particularsetting.

#Tocancelinitialsettings,pressBAND.

#Youcanalsocancelinitialsettingsbyholding

downSOURCEuntiltheunitturnsoff.

SettingtheFMtuningstep

NormallytheFMtuningstepemployedby

seektuningis50kHz.WhenAForTAison,

thetuningstepautomaticallychangesto100

kHz.Itmaybepreferabletosetthetuningstep

to50kHzwhenAFison.

!Thetuningstepremainsat50kHzduring

manualtuning.

1PressAUDIOtoselectFM.

2PresscordtoselecttheFMtuning

step.

Pressctoselect50(50kHz).Pressdtose-

lect100(100kHz).

SwitchingAutoPISeek

Theunitcanautomaticallysearchforadiffer-

entstationwiththesameprogramming,even

duringpresetrecall.

1PressAUDIOtoselectA-PI.

2PressaorbtoturntheAutoPIseek

onoroff.

Savingthebattery

consumption

Itispossibletosavethebatteryconsumption

whenthisunitisturnedoff.Afteroneminute

ofturningoffthisunit,thisunitwillbe

switchedintopowersavemode.

!Youcannotinsertandejectadiscwhile

thisunitisinpowersavemode.

!YoucanonlyuseSOURCEwhilethisunitis

inpowersavemode.

Important

Whenyoudisconnectabatteryinordertoreplace

it,thismodeisturnedoff.Wheninstallingthis

unitinavehiclethatdoesnothaveanACC(ac-

cessory)positionontheignitionswitch,thevehi-

clebatterymaybedraineddependingona

connectionmethod.Aftercheckingtheconnec-

tionmethod,turnthismodeonifneeded.

1PressAUDIOtoselectSAVE.

2Pressaorbtoturnpowersaveonor

off.

InitialSettings

En

24

Section

09

1 Operation Manual Multi-CD control High power CD player with FM/AM tuner DEH-P2650 English Español Português (B)

2 Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, put them away in a safe place for future reference. I.E.) 24 Adjusting source levels 25 2 En

3 Contents English Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 26 Setting the clock 26 Setting the FM tuning step 26 Setting the AM tuning step 27 Switching the warning tone 27 Switching the auxiliary setting 27 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off 28 Using the AUX source 28 Selecting AUX as the source 28 Setting the AUX title 28 Additional Information Understanding built-in CD player error messages 29 CD player and care 29 CD-R/CD-RW discs 30 Specifications 31 En 3

4 Section 01 Before You Start About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanatory. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this units potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and observe precautions on this page and in other sections. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the battery with the plus (+) and minus () poles pointing in the proper direction. Precautions CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.! Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions.! Always pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 the volume low enough so you can hear sounds outside of the car.! Protect this unit from moisture.! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed.! If this unit does not operate properly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the battery be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. CAUTION! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium battery.! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer.! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the battery in fire.! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools.! Do not store the battery with metallic materials.! In the event of battery leakage, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new battery.! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions rules that apply in your country/area. Using the remote control Point the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. 4 En

5 Before You Start Section 01 Important! Do not store the remote control in high temperatures or direct sunlight.! The remote control may not function properly in direct sunlight.! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor, where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for safe keeping. English Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft.! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound.! You can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 27, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to this unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Important! Never use force or grip pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 display and the buttons tightly when removing or attaching.! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks.! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2 Grip the left side of the front panel and pull it gently outward. Take care not to grip it tightly or to drop it. En 5

6 Section 02 Whats What Head unit 1 CLOCK button Press to change to the clock display. 2 PAUSE button Press to turn pause on or off. 3 LOUDNESS button Press to turn loudness on or off. 4 OPEN button Press to open the front panel. 5 FUNCTION button Press to select functions. 6 AUDIO button Press to select various sound quality controls. 7 a/b/c/d buttons Press to do manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 8 BAND button Press to select among three FM and one AM bands and cancel the control mode of functions buttons Press for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi-cd player. a EQ button Press to select various equalizer curves. b VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends outward so that it becomes easier to turn. To retract VOLUME, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, press it again. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. Press to cycle through all of the available sources. d DISPLAY button Press to select different displays. Remote control Operation is the same as when using the button on the head unit. See the explanation of the head unit about the operation of each button with the exception of ATT, which is explained below. 6 En

7 Whats What Section e h g 6 f 7 English 2 e CD button Press to select the built-in or multi-cd player as the source. f TUNER button Press to select the tuner as the source, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. g ATT button Press to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. h VOLUME button Press to increase or decrease the volume. En 7

8 Section 03 Power ON/OFF Turning the unit on % Press SOURCE to turn the unit on. When you select a source the unit is turned on. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. To switch to the built-in CD player, load a disc in this unit (refer to page 12). % When using the head unit, press SOURCE to select a source. Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: Built-in CD playertelevisiontuner Multi-CD playerexternal unit 1External unit 2AUX Notes! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to this unit. When no disc is set in this unit. When no magazine is set in the multi-cd player. When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 27).! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, enables control of basic functions by this unit. Two external units can be controlled by this unit. When two external units are connected, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit.! When this units blue/white lead is connected to the cars auto-antenna relay control terminal, the cars antenna extends when this units source is turned on. To retract the antenna, turn the source off. Turning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. % When using the remote control, press TUNER or CD to select a source. Press each button repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER: TelevisionTunerSources off CD: Built-in CD playermulti-cd player Sources off 8 En

9 Tuner Section 04 Listening to the radio These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. Important If you are using this unit in North, Central or South America, reset the AM tuning step (see Setting the AM tuning step on page 27). 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM or FM. 2 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 3 Stereo (5) indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner. Press SOURCE until tuner is selected as the source. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Press BAND to select a band. Press BAND until the desired band is displayed, F1, F2, F3 for FM or AM. 4 To performmanual tuning, press c or d with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 5 To performseek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # You can cancel seek tuning by pressing either c or d with a quick press. # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Note When the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo the stereo (5) indicator will light. English En 9

10 Section 04 Tuner Introduction of advanced pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 operation Function display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: BSM (best stations memory)local (local seek tuning) # To return to the frequency display, press BAND. Note Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 16 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a preset tuning button 16 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same preset tuning button 16 the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. Notes! Up pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored in memory.! You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning buttons 16. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LOCAL. Press FUNCTION until LOCAL appears in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 2 Press a to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to set the sensitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2LOCAL 3 LOCAL 4 AM: LOCAL 1LOCAL 2 10 En

11 Tuner Section 04 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. 4 When you want to return to normal seek tuning, press b to turn local seek tuning off. LOCAL:OFF appears in the display. English Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you automatically store the six strongest broadcast frequencies under preset tuning buttons 16 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a button. 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSM, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press FUNCTION pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 BSM appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 16 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # To cancel the storage process, press b. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using 16. En 11

12 Section 05 Built-in CD Player Playing a CD 4 Use VOLUME to adjust pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 sound level, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 5 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your built-in CD player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 2 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. CD loading slot appears. # After a CD has been inserted, press SOURCE pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 select the built-in CD player. 2 Insert a CD into the CD loading slot. Playback will automatically start. CD loading slot 6 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! The built-in CD player plays one, standard, 12- cm or 8-cm (single) CD at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm CDs.! Do not insert anything other than a CD into the CD loading slot.! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play, check that the label side of the disc is up. Press EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting the disc again.! If the built-in CD player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to Understanding built-in CD player error messages on page 29.! The built-in CD player is not equipped with CD TEXT function.! A CD TEXT disc is a CD featuring recorded text information such as disc title, artist name and track title. EJECT button # You can eject a CD by pressing EJECT. # To avoid a malfunction, make sure that no metal object comes into contact with the terminals when the front panel is open. 3 Close the front panel. 12 En

13 Built-in CD Player Section 05 Introduction of advanced built-in CD player operation 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)pause (pause) # To return to the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. 3 Press b to turn repeat play off. RPT:OFF appears in the display. The track currently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 2 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order. 3 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. English Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn repeat play on. RPT:ON appears in the display. The track currently playing will play and then repeat. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. En 13

14 Section 05 Built-in CD Player 3 When you find the desired track press b to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 48 disc titles into this unit. 1 Play a CD that you want to enter the title. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C. X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X. C B A order. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from this unit, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 14 En

15 Built-in CD Player Section 05! After data for 48 discs has pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one.! If you connect a multi-cd player, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. English Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. En 15

16 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 a CD You can use this unit to control a multi-cd player, which is sold separately. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your multi-cd player. More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 3 Track number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-cd player. Press SOURCE until multi-cd is selected as the source. 4 To performfast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 5 To skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. Pressing d skips to the start of the next track. Pressing c once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes! When the multi-cd player performs the preparatory operations, READY is displayed.! If the multi-cd player does not operate properly, an error message such as ERROR-11 may be displayed. Refer to the multi-cd player owners manual.! If there are no discs in the multi-cd player magazine, NO DISC is displayed. 50-disc multi-cd player Only those functions described in this manual are supported for 50-disc multi-cd players. 2 Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. Rotate to increase or decrease the volume. 3 Select a disc you want to listen to with the 16 buttons. For discs located at 1 to 6, press the corresponding number button. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, press and hold the corresponding numbers such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display. # You can also sequentially select a disc by pressing a/b. 16 En

17 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Introduction of advanced multi-cd player operation 2 Press c or d to select the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 range. Press c or d until the desired repeat range appears in the display.! MCD Repeat all discs in the multi-cd player! TRK Repeat just the current track! DSC Repeat the current disc English 1 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to current track. 2 Function display Shows the function status. % Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 FUNCTION to display the function names. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: RPT (repeat play)rdm (random play) SCAN (scan play)its-p (ITS play)pause (pause)comp (compression and DBE) # To return to the playback display, press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display. Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-cd player: MCD (multi-cd player repeat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (disc repeat). 1 Press FUNCTION to select RPT. Press FUNCTION until RPT appears in the display. Notes! If you select other discs during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to MCD.! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Playing tracks in a random order Random play lets pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, MCD and DSC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION to select RDM. Press FUNCTION until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn randomplay on. RDM :ON appears in the display. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. 4 Press b to turn randomplay off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. Tracks will continue to play in order. En 17

18 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Note If you turn random play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DRDM appears in the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DSC, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MCD, the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 to select SCAN. Press FUNCTION until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press b to turn scan play off, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or disc) will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, select SCAN again by pressing FUNCTION. Note After track or disc scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. If you turn scan play on during DSC and then return to the playback display, DSCAN appears in the display. Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop playback of the CD. 1 Press FUNCTION to select PAUSE. Press FUNCTION until PAUSE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn pause on. PAUSE:ON appears in the display. Play pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 the current track pauses. 3 Press b to turn pause off. PAUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will resume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note You can also turn pause on or off by pressing PAUSE. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-cd player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selections. Creating a playlist with ITS programming You can use ITS to enter and playback up script dragon critical error 99 tracks per disc, up to 100 discs (with the disc title). (With multi-cd players sold before the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. Press a or b to select a CD. 18 En

19 Multi-CD Player Section 06 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-cd player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page Press FUNCTION to select ITS-P, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press FUNCTION until ITS-P appears in the display. 3 Press a to turn ITS play on. ITS-P:ON appears in the display. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are programmed for ITS play then EMPTY is displayed. 4 Press b to turn ITS play off. ITS-P:OFF appears in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Playback will continue in normal order from the currently playing track and CD. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist When you want to delete a track from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNCTION. 1 Play a CD you want to delete a track fromyour ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on this page. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 3 Select a desired track by pressing c or d. 4 Press b to erase a track fromyour ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, EMPTY is displayed and normal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display. English En 19

20 Section 06 Multi-CD Player Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist When you want to delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist, you can if ITS play is off. 1 Play a CD that you want to delete, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display, then press FUNCTION to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION until ITS appears in the display. 3 Press b to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD fromyour ITS playlist, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLR is displayed. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Using disc title functions You can input CD titles and display the title. Then you can easily search for and select a desired disc for play. Entering disc titles Disc title input lets you input CD titles up to 8 letters long and up to 100 disc titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi-cd player, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 1 Play a CD that pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 want to enter the title. Press a or b to select a CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. After TITLE IN is displayed, press FUNCTION repeatedly, the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input)its (ITS programming) # When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player, you cannot switch to TITLE IN. The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C. X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X. C B A order. 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. When you press d one more time, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, the entered title is stored in memory. 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display. Notes! Titles remain in memory, even after the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted.! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memory, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. 20 En

21 Multi-CD Player Section 06 Displaying disc titles You can display the title of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the currently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO TITLE is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions You can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-cd player. Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artists name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these specially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below. Displaying titles on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLAY. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play timedisc TTL (disc title)art NAME (disc artist name)trk TTL (track title) ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO D-TTL). Scrolling titles in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL, ART NAME, TRK TTL and ART NAME, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLAY and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display. Using compression and bass emphasis You can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using the COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions let you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi-cd player, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Each of the functions have a two-step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at higher volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select through them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. Press FUNCTION until COMP appears in the display. # If the multi-cd player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you attempt to select it. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite setting. Press a or b repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFFCOMP 1COMP 2 COMP OFFDBE 1DBE 2 English En 21

22 Section 07 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the source display. 1 CUSTOM indicator Shows when custom equalizer curve is pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 selected. 2 Equalizer curve Shows which equalizer preset is currently selected. 3 FIE indicator Shows pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 the front image enhancer is turned on. 4 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status. 5 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio function names. Press AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment)eq (equalizer) LOUD (loudness)fie (front image enhancer)sla (source level adjustment) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA. # To return to the display of each source, press BAND. Using balance pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FAD. Press AUDIO until FAD appears in the display. # If the balance setting has been previously adjusted, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to error accessing in boot sector file front/rear speaker balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. FAD :F15 FAD :R15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press c or d, BAL : 0 is displayed, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL :L9 BAL :R9 is displayed as the left/right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. 22 En

23 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves: Display SPR-BASS POWERFUL NATURAL VOCAL CUSTOM EQ FLAT Equalizer curve Super bass Powerful Natural Vocal Custom Flat! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create.! A separate CUSTOM curve can be created for each source. (The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same equalizer adjustment setting automatically.) If you make adjustments, the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM.! When EQ FLAT is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between EQ FLAT and a set equalizer curve. 2 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: EQ-L (low)eq-m (mid)eq-h (high) 3 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 replace the previous pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve. Fine adjusting equalizer curve You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each currently selected curve band (EQ-L/EQ-M/EQ-H). English % Press EQ to select the equalizer. Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: SPR-BASSPOWERFULNATURAL VOCALCUSTOMEQ FLAT Level (db) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 (Hz) Adjusting equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve settings are memorized in CUSTOM. 1 Press AUDIO to pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 EQ. Press AUDIO until EQ appears in the display. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display. 2 Press AUDIO to select the desired band for adjustment. LowMidHigh En 23

24 Section 07 Audio Adjustments 3 Press c or d to select the desired frequency. Press c or d until the pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 frequency appears in the display. Low: (Hz) Mid: k2k (Hz) High: 3k8k10k12k (Hz) 4 Press a or b to select the desired Q factor. Press a or b until the desired Q factor appears in the display. 2N1N1W2W Note If you make adjustments when a curve other than CUSTOM is selected, the newly adjusted curve will replace the previous curve. Then a new curve with CUSTOM appears on the display while selecting the equalizer curve, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. Press AUDIO until LOUD appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD :MID) appears in the display. 3 Press c or d to select a pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 level. Each press of c or d selects level in the following order: LOW (low)mid (mid)hi (high) 4 Press b to turn loudness off. LOUD :OFF appears in the display. Note You can also turn loudness on or off by pressing LOUDNESS. Front image enhancer (F.I.E.) The F.I.E. (Front Image Enhancer) function is a simple method of enhancing front imaging by cutting mid- and high-range frequency output from the rear speakers, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, limiting their output to low-range frequencies. You can select the frequency you want to cut. Precaution When the F.I.E. function is deactivated, the rear speakers output sound of all frequencies, not just bass sounds. Reduce the volume before disengaging F.I.E. to prevent a sudden increase in volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select FIE. Press AUDIO until FIE appears in the display. 2 Press a to turn F.I.E. on. # To turn F.I.E. off, press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired frequency. Each press of c or d selects frequency in the following order: (Hz) Notes! After turning the F.I.E. function on, use the balance adjustment (refer to page 22) and adjust front and rear speaker volume levels until they are balanced.! Turn the F.I.E. function off when using a 2- speaker system, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 24 En

25 Audio Adjustments Section 07 Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources.! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. English 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. Press AUDIO until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source volume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. SLA : +4 SLA : -4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes! The AM tuner volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments.! The built-in CD player and the multi-cd player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. En 25

26 Section 08 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 2 Press c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Pressing c or d will select one segment of the clock display: HourMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of different settings for this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until the clock appears in the display. 3 Press FUNCTION to select one of the initial settings. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following settings: ClockFM (FM tuning step)am (AM tuning step)warn (warning tone)aux (auxiliary input) Use the following instructions to operate each particular setting. # To cancel initial settings, press BAND. # You can also cancel initial settings by holding down FUNCTION until the unit turns off. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press FUNCTION to select clock, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until clock appears in the display. 3 Press a or b to set the clock. Pressing a will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing b will decrease the selected hour or minute. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 khz, the preset step, and 50 khz. 1 Press FUNCTION to select FM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until FM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 100 khz and 50 khz. The selected FM tuning step will appear in the display. Note If seek tuning is performed in 50 khz steps, stations may be tuned in imprecisely. Tune in the stations with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. 26 En

27 Initial Settings Section 08 Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 khz, the preset step, and 10 khz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 khz (531 1,602 khz allowable) to 10 khz (530 1,640 khz allowable). 1 Press FUNCTION to select AM. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AM appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the AM tuning step. Pressing c or d will switch the AM tuning step between 9 khz and 10 khz, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until AUX appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn AUX on or off. Pressing a or b will turn AUX on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, AUX :ON), pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. English Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. You can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press FUNCTION to select WARN. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until WARN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to turn WARN on or off. Pressing a or b will turn WARN on or off and that status will be displayed (e.g., WARN :ON). Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment connected to this unit. En 27

28 Section 09 Other Functions Turning the clock display on or off You can turn the clock display on or off. % Press CLOCK to turn the clock display on or off. Each press of CLOCK turns the clock display on or off, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. # The clock display disappears temporarily when you perform other operations, but the clock display appears again after 25 seconds. 1 After you have pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 AUX as the source, press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of a will display a letter of the alphabet in A B C. X Y Z and numbers in order. Each press of b will display a letter in the reverse order, such as Z Y X. C B A order. Note Even when the sources are off, the clock display appears on the display. Pressing CLOCK turns the clock display on or off. Using the AUX source An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owners manual. 3 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter. Press c to move backwards in the display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. 4 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memory. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11. Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. Press SOURCE until AUX appears in the display. # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switching the auxiliary setting on the previous page. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 28 En

29 Additional Information Appendix Understanding built-in CD player error messages When problems occur during CD play an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears on the display refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Message Cause Action ERROR-11, 12, Dirty disc Clean disc. 17, 30 ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30 Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-10, 11, 12, 17, 30, A0 ERROR-22, 23 ERROR-44 HEAT Electrical or mechanical The CD format cannot be played back All tracks are skip tracks CD player overheated CD player and care Turn the ignition ON and OFF, or switch to a different source, then back to the CD player. Replace disc. Replace disc. Turn off the CD player until the CD player cools down.! Use only CDs that have the Compact Disc Digital Audio mark as show below.! Use only normal, round CDs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped CDs they may jam in the CD player or not play properly.! Check all CDs for cracks, scratches or warped discs before playing. CDs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs.! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side) surface when handling the disc.! Store discs in their cases when not in use.! Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures.! Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs.! To clean dirt from a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center of the disc.! If the heater is used in cold weather, moisture may form on components inside the CD player. Condensation may cause the CD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the CD player for an hour or so to allow the CD player to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture.! Road shocks may interrupt CD playback. English En 29

30 Appendix Additional Information CD-R/CD-RW discs! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized.! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit.! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the application settings and the environment. Please record with the correct format. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.)! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the storage conditions in the car.! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit.! This unit conforms to the track skip function of the CD-R/CD-RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically.! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc.! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. 30 En

31 Additional Information Appendix Specifications General Rated power source V DC (allowable voltage range: V DC) Grounding system. Negative type Max. current consumption A Dimensions (W H D): DIN Chassis mm Nose mm D Chassis mm Nose mm Weight kg Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15,000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output W 4 Load impedance. 4 W (4 8 W allowable) Preout max output level/output impedance V/1 kw Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency. 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain. ±12dB Mid Frequency /500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain. ±12dB High Frequency k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Factor /0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 db when boosted) Gain. ±12dB Loudness contour Low db (100 Hz), +3 db (10 khz) Mid db (100 Hz), +6.5 db (10 khz) High db (100 Hz), +11 db (10 khz) (volume: 30 db) CD player System. Compact disc audio system Usable discs. Compact disc Pioneer deh 4700mp error-11 format: Sampling frequency khz Number of quantization bits. 16; linear Frequency characteristics ,000 Hz (±1 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (1 khz) (IEC-A network) Dynamic range db (1 khz) Number of channels. 2 (stereo) FM tuner Frequency range MHz Usable sensitivity. 8 dbf (0.7 µv/75 W, mono, S/N: 30 db) 50 db quieting sensitivity dbf (0.9 µv/75 W, mono) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Distortion % (at 65 dbf, pioneer deh 4700mp error-11, 1 khz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dbf, 1 khz, mono) Frequency response ,000 Hz (±3 db) Stereo separation db (at 65 dbf, 1 khz) AM tuner Frequency range ,602 khz (9 khz) 530 1,640 khz (10 khz) Usable sensitivity µv (S/N: 20 db) Signal-to-noise ratio db (IEC-A network) Infrared remote control Wavelength nm ±50 nm Output. typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements. English En 31

Mostrar más

You can watch a thematic video

Pioneer car stereo reset kaise Kare pioneer deh 4700mp error-11

0 Comments

Leave a Comment